Catalog FR-A700 Instruction manual (basic)-Beeteco.com

FR-A700
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (BASIC)
FR-A720-0.4K to 90K
FR-A740-0.4K to 500K
INVERTER
IB(NA)-0600225ENG-D(0703)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
FR-A700INVERTERINSTRUCTIONMANUAL(BASIC)
D
700HEAD OFFICE:TOKYO BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100-8310
1
2
3
4
5
6
CONTENTS
PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION ............................. 1
INSTALLATION AND WIRING...................................................................... 2
2.1 Peripheral devices.....................................................................................................3
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover............................................5
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions ...............................................................7
2.4 Wiring ........................................................................................................................8
2.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC).................................................................35
2.6 Precautions for use of the inverter..........................................................................36
2.7 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)...............................................37
DRIVE THE MOTOR.................................................................................... 38
3.1 Step of operation.....................................................................................................38
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07)....................................................................................39
3.3 Before operation......................................................................................................47
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)......................................73
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (external operation)......................................78
3.6 Parameter List.........................................................................................................85
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................... 129
4.1 Reset method of protective function .....................................................................129
4.2 List of alarm display ..............................................................................................130
4.3 Causes and corrective actions..............................................................................131
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters.....................................144
4.5 Check and clear of the alarm history ....................................................................145
4.6 Check first when you have troubles......................................................................147
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION..................... 150
5.1 Inspection item......................................................................................................150
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................... 158
6.1 Rating....................................................................................................................158
6.2 Common specifications.........................................................................................162
6.3 Outline dimension drawings..................................................................................163
6.4 Installation of the heatsink portion outside the enclosure for use.........................176
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual (basic) is intended for users who "just want to run the inverter".
If you are going to utilize functions and performance, refer to the Instruction Manual (applied) [IB-0600226ENG].
The Instruction Manual (applied) is separately available from where you purchased the inverter or your Mitsubishi
sales representative.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Tư vấn chọn sản phẩm
Giao hàng tận nơi
Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật
Chính sách hậu mãi đa dạng
DỊCH VỤ CHĂM SÓC KHÁCH HÀNG TOÀN DIỆN
Nhà cung cấp thiết bị điện chuyên nghiệp
Hotline: 0904.676.925
CÔNG TY TNHH THƯƠNG MẠI KỸ THUẬT ASTER
Số 7 Đại lộ Độc Lập, KCN Sóng Thần,
P. Dĩ An, Tx. Dĩ An, Bình Dương, VN.
Tel: (0650) 3617 012
Fax: (0650) 3617 011
www.beeteco.com

A-1
This instruction manual (basic) provides handling information and precautions for use of the equipment.
Please forward this instruction manual (basic) to the end user.
4. Additional Instructions
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric
shock, etc.
This section is specifically about safety matters
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you
have read through this instruction manual (basic) and appended documents
carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until
you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and
instructions. In this instruction manual (basic), the safety instruction levels are
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
Assumes that incorrect handling may cause
hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause physical damage only.
Note that even the level may lead to a serious consequence
according to conditions. Please follow strictly the instructions of both levels
because they are important to personnel safety.
1. Electric Shock Prevention
• While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover.
Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover removed.
Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging
part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
• Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic
inspection.You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
• Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the operation panel
indicator is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been
switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the
like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and
it is dangerous.
• This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to
the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes.
(NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should
be fully competent to do the work.
• Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock
or be injured.
• Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric
shock. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or
pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not replace the cooling fan while power is on. It is dangerous to replace the
cooling fan while power is on.
• Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands. You may get an electric shock.
• When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity, the DC voltage is applied to
the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after
powering off to prevent an electric shock.
2. Fire Prevention
• Install the inverter on an incombustible wall without holes, etc.
Mounting it to or near combustible material can cause a fire.
• If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power.
A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire.
• When using a brake resistor, make up a sequence that will turn off power when
an alarm signal is output.
Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the
brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
• Do not connect the resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/-. This could cause
a fire.
3. Injury Prevention
• Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal.
Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur.
• Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, burst,
damage, etc. may occur.
• Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage, etc. Otherwise,
burst, damage, etc. may occur.
• While power is on or for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter as it
is hot and you may get burnt.
(1) Transportation and installation
• When carrying products, use correct lifting gear to prevent injury.
• Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
• Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the
inverter. Install according to the information in the instruction manual.
• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts missing. This can
result in breakdowns.
• When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may
fall off or fail.
• Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
• Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
• Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other
flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter.
• As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.
• Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions. Otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
Environment
Ambient temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C *1
Atmosphere
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable
gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude, vibration
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard
operation. 5.9m/s2 or less *2
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
*2 2.9m/s2 or less for the 160K or more.
(2) Wiring
• Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge suppressor/radio
noise filter (capacitor type filter) on the inverter output side.
• The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect
the direction of rotation of the motor.
(3) Test operation and adjustment
• Before starting operation, confirm and adjust the parameters. A failure to do so
may cause some machines to make unexpected motions.
(4) Operation
• When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as it
will restart suddenly after an alarm stop.
• Since the key is valid only when functions are set (refer to page 100),
provide a circuit and switch separately to make an emergency stop (power off,
mechanical brake operation for emergency stop, etc).
• Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure
to do so may restart the motor suddenly.
• The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any
other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the inverter as well as
equipment.
• Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control (real
sensorless vector control) may start the motor running at a low speed even
when the start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also at a
low speed when the speed limit value = 0 with a start command input. Perform
pre-excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the
motor runs.
• Do not modify the equipment.
• Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so
may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.
• The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee protection of the motor
from overheating.
• Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/
stopping of the inverter.
• Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise
nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
• Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from
the inverter may heat/damage the power factor correction capacitor and
generator.
• When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, please use an insulation-enhanced
motor or measures taken to suppress surge voltages. Surge voltages
attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,
deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
• When parameter clear or all clear is performed, reset the required parameters
before starting operations. Each parameter returns to the initial value.
• The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its
setting, fully examine the performances of the motor and machine.
• In addition to the inverter's holding function, install a holding device to ensure
safety.
• Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always
perform inspection and test operation.
• For prevention of damage due to static electricity, touch nearby metal before
touching this product to eliminate static electricity from your body.
(5) Emergency stop
• Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the
machine and equipment from hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
• When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short
circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip,
then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
• When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective
action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
• Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the
inverter.
(7) Disposing of the inverter
• Treat as industrial waste.
General instructions
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual (basic) show the
inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never run the inverter in this status.
Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual (basic) when
operating the inverter.
CAUTION
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION

I
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION 1
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 2
2.1 Peripheral devices .................................................................................................3
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover .........................................5
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions............................................................. 7
2.4 Wiring..................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................... 8
2.4.2 EMC filter................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 10
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring. ........ 10
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 20
2.4.6 Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 23
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit ............................................................................................................ 25
2.4.8 When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable ............................................ 26
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 26
2.4.10 Communication operation........................................................................................................ 27
2.4.11 USB connector ........................................................................................................................ 27
2.4.12 Connection of motor with encoder (vector control).................................................................. 28
2.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) ..............................................................35
2.6 Precautions for use of the inverter .......................................................................36
2.7 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)............................................. 37
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR 38
3.1 Step of operation.................................................................................................. 38
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07).................................................................................39
3.2.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07).................................................................................. 39
3.2.2 Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 40
3.2.3 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s)) ...................................................... 41
3.2.4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage ...................................................................... 42
3.2.5 First priority monitor................................................................................................................. 42
3.2.6 Setting dial push ...................................................................................................................... 42
3.2.7 Change the parameter setting value ....................................................................................... 43
3.2.8 Parameter clear, all parameter clear ....................................................................................... 44
3.2.9 Parameter copy and parameter verification............................................................................. 45
3.3 Before operation .................................................................................................. 47
3.3.1 Simple mode parameter list..................................................................................................... 47
3.3.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9) .......................................................... 48
3.3.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3) .................................................................... 49
3.3.4 Increase the starting torque (Pr. 0) ......................................................................................... 50
3.3.5 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) ........................................... 51
3.3.6 Change acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)........................................................ 52
3.3.7 Selection of the start command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79) .......................... 53
3.3.8 Large starting torque and low speed torque are necessary (advanced magnetic
flux vector control, real sensorless vector control) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800) ............... 54
— CONTENTS —

II
CONTENTS
3.3.9 Higher accuracy operation using a motor with encoder (Vector control)
(Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.800) .......................................................................... 57
3.3.10 To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96) .............................................................................................. 62
3.3.11 High accuracy operation unaffected by the motor temperature
(online auto tuning) (Pr. 95) ................................................................................................ 66
3.3.12 To perform high accuracy/fast response operation (gain adjustment of real
sensorless vector control and vector control) (Pr. 818 to Pr. 821, Pr. 880) .......................... 67
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode) ................................... 73
3.4.1 Set the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)............................ 73
3.4.2 Use the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation. ............................................... 74
3.4.3 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed setting)....... 75
3.4.4 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) ............................................................... 76
3.4.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input) ............................................................... 77
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (external operation) ................................... 78
3.5.1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3) ................................................ 78
3.5.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command
(multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6) ........................................................................................ 79
3.5.3 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input) ............................................................... 81
3.5.4 Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer
(at 5V, initial value) .................................................................................................................. 82
3.5.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input) ............................................................... 83
(at 20mA, initial value)............................................................................................................. 84
3.6 Parameter List...................................................................................................... 85
3.6.1 List of parameters classified by purpose of use ...................................................................... 85
3.6.2 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................... 88
4 TROUBLESHOOTING 129
4.1 Reset method of protective function .................................................................. 129
4.2 List of alarm display ........................................................................................... 130
4.3 Causes and corrective actions........................................................................... 131
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters .................................. 144
4.5 Check and clear of the alarm history .................................................................145
4.6 Check first when you have troubles ................................................................... 147
4.6.1 Motor will not start ................................................................................................................. 147
4.6.2 Motor generates abnormal noise........................................................................................... 147
4.6.3 Motor generates heat abnormally.......................................................................................... 148
4.6.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction ........................................................................................ 148
4.6.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting.................................................................................... 148
4.6.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth................................................................................ 148
4.6.7 Motor current is large............................................................................................................. 148
4.6.8 Speed does not increase....................................................................................................... 148
4.6.9 Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 149
4.6.10 Operation mode is not changed properly .............................................................................. 149
4.6.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 149
4.6.12 POWER lamp is not lit ........................................................................................................... 149
4.6.13 Parameter write cannot be performed ................................................................................... 149

III
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 150
5.1 Inspection item................................................................................................... 150
5.1.1 Daily inspection ..................................................................................................................... 150
5.1.2 Periodic inspection ................................................................................................................ 150
5.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection................................................................................................. 151
5.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 152
5.1.5 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ 153
5.1.6 Replacement of parts ............................................................................................................ 153
5.1.7 Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 157
6 SPECIFICATIONS 158
6.1 Rating................................................................................................................. 158
6.1.1 Inverter rating ........................................................................................................................ 158
6.1.2 Motor rating ........................................................................................................................... 160
6.2 Common specifications...................................................................................... 162
6.3 Outline dimension drawings...............................................................................163
6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings ...................................................................................... 163
6.3.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings........................................................................ 171
6.4 Installation of the heatsink portion outside the enclosure for use ......................176
6.4.1 When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) ................................................... 176
6.4.2 Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-A740-160K or more ........................................................... 176
APPENDICES 179
Appendix 1For customers who have replaced the older model with this
inverter...................................................................................................... 179
Appendix 1-1Replacement of the FR-A500 series ............................................................................. 179
Appendix 1-2Replacement of the FR-A200 <EXCELENT> series .................................................... 180
Appendix 2 Instructions for UL and cUL Compliance.................................................. 181
Appendix 3Instructions for Compliance with the European Directives........................ 183
<Abbreviations>
DU: Operation panel (FR-DU07)
PU: Operation panel(FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07)
Inverter: Mitsubishi inverter FR-A700 series
FR-A700: Mitsubishi inverter FR-A700 series
Pr.: Parameter Number
PU operation: Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
External operation: Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation: Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and external operation
Standard motor: SF-JR
Constant-torque motor: SF-HRCA
Vector dedicated motor: SF-V5RU
<Trademarks>
LONWORKS®
is registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.).
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

1
1
PRODUCTCHECKINGANDPARTSIDENTIFICATION
1 PRODUCT CHECKING AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to
ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
REMARKS
For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 5.
Harmonic suppression guideline
All models of general-purpose inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who
receive high voltage or special high voltage". (For further details, refer to section 3 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
Front cover
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
Control circuit
terminal block
AU/PTC switchover switch
Main circuit
terminal block
Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Cooling fan
PU connectorRS-485 terminals
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the instruction manual of options.)
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
(major fault).
Capacity plate
Inverter type Serial number
Capacity plate
Rating plate
USB connector
Voltage/current input switch
Charge lamp
Lit when power is supplied
to the main circuit
K3.7
Indicate inverter
capacity (kW)
FR-A720-3.7K
FR - -A720
Symbol Voltage Class
A720 Three-phase 200V class
• Inverter Type
Rating plate
Inverter type
Input rating
Output rating
Serial number
FR-A720-3.7K
Applied motor
capacity
A740 Three-phase 400V class
Combed shaped
wiring cover
(Refer to page 22)
(Refer to page 39)
(Refer to page 9)
(Refer to page 10)
(Refer to page 154)
(Refer to page 26)
(Refer to page 20)
(Refer to section 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
• Accessory
· Fan cover fixing screws (22K or less) (Refer to page 183 )
These screws are necessary for compliance with the
European Directive.
Capacity Screw Size (mm) Number
2
0
0
V
1.5K to 3.7K M3 × 35 1
5.5K to 11K M4 × 40 2
15K to 22K M4 × 50 1
4
0
0
V
2.2K, 3.7K M3 × 35 1
5.5K to 15K M4 × 40 2
18.5K, 22K M4 × 50 1
(Refer to page 14)
(Refer to page 10)
(Refer to page 5)
(Refer to page 27)
(Refer to page 8)
· DC reactor supplied (75K or more)
· Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (30K to
280K)
M8 × two pieces

2
2 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side. This will cause the
inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(Refer to section 2 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
Noise filter
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Motor
Devices connected to the output
P/+
P/+
PR
PR
AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Install a noise filter to reduce
the electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 1MHz to 10MHz. A wire
should be wound four turns at
a maximum.
Power supply harmonics can
be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.
Great braking capability is obtained.
The regenerative braking
capability of the inverter can
be exhibited fully.
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.
USB connector
A personal computer and an inverter can
be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable.
Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
earth leakage current breaker (ELB),
fuse
The breaker must be selected carefully
since an in-rush current flows in the inverter
at power on.
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will
cause the inverter life to be shorten.
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output
side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case
circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter,
contact each manufacturer for selection of the
moulded case circuit breaker.
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P1P/+ N/-P/+ U W
P/+
PR
V
High power factor converter
(FR-HC*1, MT-HC*2)
Power regeneration
common converter (FR-CV*1)
Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC*2)
Resistor unit
(FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2)
Brake unit
(FR-BU2, FR-BU*1, MT-BU5*2)
Noise filter
(FR-BLF)
Earth (Ground)
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the
motor and inverter.
Earth
(Ground)
The 55K or less has
a built-in common
mode core.
For the 75K or more, a
DC reactor is supplied.
Always install the reactor.
*1 Compatible with the 55K or less.
*2 Compatible with the 75K or more.
High-duty brake resistor
(FR-ABR*3)
Braking capability of the inverter built-
in brake can be improved. Remove
the jumper across terminal PR-PX
when connecting the high-duty brake
resistor. (7.5K or less)
Always install a thermal relay when
using a brake resistor whose capacity
is 11K or more.
*3 Compatible with the 22K or less.
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option)
Reactors (option) must be used when power
harmonics measures are taken, the power factor is
to be improved or the inverter is installed near a
large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors. Select the reactor according to the model.
Remove the jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1 to
connect the DC reactor to the 55K or less.
(Refer to page 158)
(Refer to page 4)
(Refer to page 27)
(Refer to page 35)
(Refer to section 3 of Instruction Manual
(applied)) )
Inverter (FR-A700)
The life of the inverter is influenced by
ambient temperature. The ambient
temperature should be as low as possible
within the permissible range. This must be
noted especially when the inverter is
installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 7)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the
inverter. The control signal lines must be
kept fully away from the main circuit to
protect them from noise.(Refer to page 8)
Refer to page 9 for the built-in EMC filter.

3
Peripheral devices
2INSTALLATIONANDWIRING
2.1 Peripheral devices
Check the motor capacity of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to
the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
200V class
Motor Output
(kW)*1
Applicable Inverter Type
Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Reactor connection Reactor connection
without with without with
0.4 FR-A720-0.4K 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10
0.75 FR-A720-0.75K 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10
1.5 FR-A720-1.5K 30AF 15A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10
2.2 FR-A720-2.2K 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10
3.7 FR-A720-3.7K 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20, N21 S-N10
5.5 FR-A720-5.5K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N25 S-N20, N21
7.5 FR-A720-7.5K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N25
11 FR-A720-11K 100AF 75A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N35
15 FR-A720-15K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50
18.5 FR-A720-18.5K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50
22 FR-A720-22K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65
30 FR-A720-30K 225AF 225A 225AF 175A S-N95 S-N80
37 FR-A720-37K 400AF 250A 225AF 225A S-N150 S-N125
45 FR-A720-45K 400AF 300A 400AF 300A S-N180 S-N150
55 FR-A720-55K 400AF 400A 400AF 350A S-N220 S-N180
75 FR-A720-75K ⎯ 400AF 400A ⎯ S-N300
90 FR-A720-90K ⎯ 400AF 400A ⎯ S-N300
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For installations in the United States or Canada, use the fuse certified by the UL and cUL.
(Refer to page 181.)
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC
with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
*4 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify
the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
IM
IM

4
Peripheral devices
400V class
Motor Output
(kW)*1
Applicable Inverter Type
Breaker Selection*2,4 Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Reactor connection Reactor connection
without with without with
0.4 FR-A740-0.4K 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10
0.75 FR-A740-0.75K 30AF 5A 30AF 5A S-N10 S-N10
1.5 FR-A740-1.5K 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10
2.2 FR-A740-2.2K 30AF 10A 30AF 10A S-N10 S-N10
3.7 FR-A740-3.7K 30AF 20A 30AF 15A S-N10 S-N10
5.5 FR-A740-5.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 20A S-N20 S-N11, N12
7.5 FR-A740-7.5K 30AF 30A 30AF 30A S-N20 S-N20
11 FR-A740-11K 50AF 50A 50AF 40A S-N20 S-N20
15 FR-A740-15K 100AF 60A 50AF 50A S-N25 S-N20
18.5 FR-A740-18.5K 100AF 75A 100AF 60A S-N25 S-N25
22 FR-A740-22K 100AF 100A 100AF 75A S-N35 S-N25
30 FR-A740-30K 225AF 125A 100AF 100A S-N50 S-N50
37 FR-A740-37K 225AF 150A 225AF 125A S-N65 S-N50
45 FR-A740-45K 225AF 175A 225AF 150A S-N80 S-N65
55 FR-A740-55K 225AF 200A 225AF 175A S-N80 S-N80
75 FR-A740-75K ⎯ 225AF 225A ⎯ S-N95
90 FR-A740-90K ⎯ 225AF 225A ⎯ S-N150
110 FR-A740-110K ⎯ 225AF 225A ⎯ S-N180
132 FR-A740-132K ⎯ 400AF 400A ⎯ S-N220
160 FR-A740-160K ⎯ 400AF 400A ⎯ S-N300
185 FR-A740-185K ⎯ 400AF 400A ⎯ S-N300
220 FR-A740-220K ⎯ 600AF 500A ⎯ S-N400
250 FR-A740-250K ⎯ 600AF 600A ⎯ S-N600
280 FR-A740-280K ⎯ 600AF 600A ⎯ S-N600
315 FR-A740-315K ⎯ 800AF 700A ⎯ S-N600
355 FR-A740-355K ⎯ 800AF 800A ⎯ S-N600
400 FR-A740-400K ⎯ 1000AF 900A ⎯ S-N800
450 FR-A740-450K ⎯ 1000AF 1000A ⎯
1000A
Rated product
500 FR-A740-500K ⎯ 1200AF 1200A ⎯
1000A
Rated product
*1 Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
*2 Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For installations in the United States or Canada, use the fuse certified by the UL and cUL.
*3 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC
with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
*4 When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify
the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
MCCB INV
MCCB INV
IM
IM

5
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
2.2 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
•Removal of the operation panel
1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel.
(These screws cannot be removed.)
2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel
and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.
When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the
operation panel.
FR-A720-0.4K to 22K, FR-A740-0.4K to 22K
•Removal
•Reinstallation
Installation hook
Front cover Front cover
1) Loosen the installation screws of the
front cover.
2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an
installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover Front cover
Front cover
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of
the front cover into the sockets of the
inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports,
securely press the front cover
against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done
with the operation panel mounted,
make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)
3) Tighten the installation
screws and fix the front
cover.

6
Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
FR-A720-30K or more, FR-A740-30K or more
•Removal
•Reinstallation
CAUTION
1. Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
2. The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before
reinstalling the front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where
it was removed.
Front cover 2
Front cover 1
Installation hook
1) Remove installation screws on
the front cover 1 to remove the
front cover 1.
2) Loosen the installation
screws of the front cover 2.
3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to remove
by pushing an installation hook on the right
side using left fixed hooks as supports.
Front cover 2 Front cover 2
Front cover 2
Front cover 1
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the
front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely press the
front cover 2 against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done with the operation
panel mounted, make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)
3) Fix the front cover 2 with the installation screws. 4) Fix the front cover 1 with the installation
screws.
REMARKS
⋅ For the FR-A720-55K and the FR-A740-160K or more, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.

7
Installation of the inverter and instructions
2.3 Installation of the inverter and instructions
• Installation of the Inverter
• Install the inverter under the following conditions.
• The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following
conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
Installation on the enclosure
0.4K to 22K 30K or more
REMARKS
For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-A740-160K or more, 30cm of space is necessary in front of the inverter.
Refer to page 154 for fan replacement.
CAUTION
⋅ When encasing multiple inverters, install them in
parallel as a cooling measure.
⋅ Install the inverter vertically.
* Refer to the clearances below.
Vertical
*Fix six positions for the FR-A740-
160K to 355K and fix eight positions
for the FR-A740-400K to 500K.
Ambient temperature and humidity
Measurement
position
Measurement
position
Inverter5cm 5cm
5cm
Temperature: -10°C to 50°C
Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances
and take cooling measures.
Clearances (Side)
5cm or
more Inverter
Clearances (Front)
55K or less 75K or more
20cm or more
20cm or more
10cm or
more
10cm or
more
10cm or more
10cm or more
5cm or
more
5cm or
more
*1cm or more for 3.7K or less
**
Direct sunlight High temperature,
high humidity
Horizontal placement
Mounting to
combustible material
Oil mist, flammable
gas, corrosive gas,
fluff, dust, etc.
Transportation by
holding the front cover
Vertical mounting
(When installing two or
more inverters, install
them in parallel.)
Vibration(5.9m/s2 or more*)
* 2.9m/s2 or more for the
160K or more

8
Wiring
2.4 Wiring
2.4.1 Terminal connection diagram
CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm away from the power cables.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
· Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
PC
10E(+10V)
10(+5V)
2
(Analog common)
2
3
1
1
4
Jumper
C1
B1
A1
U
V
W
P1
0 to ±10VDC
*1
0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC
MC
Main circuit
Control circuit
C2
B2
A2
IM
0 to 20mADC
AU
PTC
TXD+
TXD-
RXD+
RXD-
SG
GND
SINK
SOURCE
*4
*3
*5
STF
STR
STOP
RH
RM
RL
JOG
RT
MRS
RES
AU
CS
SD
RUN
SU
IPF
OL
FU
SE
(+)
(-)
5
ON
OFF
VCC
(+)
(-)
5V
*2 Earth (Ground)
PX PR N/-P/+
*8
*3. JOG terminal can be used
as pulse train input terminal.
Use Pr.291 to select
JOG/pulse.
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal
Three-phase AC
power supply
MCCB
Jumper
Earth
(Ground)
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connecter
Earth
(Ground)
selected
selected0 to ±5VDC *5
4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC
selected *5
Option connector 1
Option connector 2
Option connector 3
Connector
for plug-in option
connection
Frequency setting signal (Analog)
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ
*6
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Forward
rotation
start
Reverse
rotation
start
Start self-
holding selection
Terminal functions vary with
the input terminal
assignment (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
Middle
speed
High speed
Low speed
Multi-speed
selection
Jog mode
Second function selection
Output stop
Reset
Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
USB
connector
PU
connector
Terminating
resistor
Data reception
Data transmission
RS-485 terminals
Open collector output common
Sink/source common
Frequency detection
Running
Up to frequency
Instantaneous
power failure
Overload
Terminal functions
vary with the output
terminal assignment
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Open collector output
(Permissible load
current 100mA)
Relay output 2
Relay output 1
(Alarm output)
Terminal functions
vary with the output
terminal assignment
(Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
Relay output
Motor
*4. AU terminal can be
used as PTC input
terminal.
*2. To supply power to the
control circuit separately,
remove the jumper across
R1/L11 and S1/L21.
*10.It is not necessary
when calibrating the
indicator from the
operation panel.
*6. It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ
when the frequency setting signal
is changed frequently.
Jumper
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
ON
4 2
OFF
Voltage/current
input switch
*5
Auxiliary
input
Terminal
4 input
(Current
input)
Brake unit
(Option)
CN8
*7
Jumper
*5. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog
input specifications
switchover (Pr. 73, Pr. 267).
Set the voltage/current input
switch in the OFF position to
select voltage input (0 to 5V/0
to10V) and ON to select
current input (4 to 20mA).
R
R
*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Be sure to connect the DC reactor
supplied with the 75K or more.
When a DC reactor is connected to
the 55K or less, remove the jumper
across P1-P/+.
*7. A CN8 connector is provided with the 75K
or more.
Sink logic
*8. Brake resistor (FR-ABR)
Remove the jumper across terminal PR-PX
when connecting a brake resistor.
(0.4K to 7.5K)
Terminal PR is provided for the 0.4K to 22K.
Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheat
and burnout of the brake resistor.
*9
*9.The FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K
are not provided with the EMC
filter ON/OFF connector. (Always on)
FM
SD
+ -
AM
5
*11
*11. FM terminal can
be used for pulse
train output of open
collector output
using Pr.291.
(+)
(-)
(0 to 10VDC)
Analog signal output
Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale
(Frequency meter, etc.)
Indicator
Calibration
resistor *10
24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor)
Contact input common
(Refer to page 37)
(Refer to section 4 of the
Instruction Manual
(Refer to section 4 of
the Instruction
Manual (applied))
(Refer to section 4 of
the Instruction
Manual (applied))
(Refer to section 4 of the
Instruction Manual (applied))

9
Wiring
2.4.2 EMC filter
This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and zero-phase reactor.
Effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF).
To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position.
The input side zero-phase reactor, built-in the 55K or less inverter, is always valid regardless of on/off of the EMC filter
on/off connector.
The FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (The EMC filter is always valid.)
<How to disconnect the connector>
(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is off, wait for
at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like. (Refer to page 5.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or
forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.
CAUTION
⋅ Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
⋅ Enabling (turning on) the EMC filter increases leakage current. (Refer to section 3 of Instruction Manual (applied))
WARNING
While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
EMC filter OFF EMC filter OFF EMC filter OFFEMC filter ON EMC filter ON EMC filter ON
(initial setting) (initial setting) (initial setting)
EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector
VU W
3.7K or less 5.5K, 7.5K 11K or more
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K
FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K
FR-A740-5.5K to 7.5K
FR-A720-11K
FR-A740-11K, 15K
FR-A720-15K to 22K
FR-A740-18.5K to 22K
FR-A720-30K or more
FR-A740-30K or more
EMC filter
ON/OFF connector
(Side view)
Disengage connector fixing tab With tab disengaged,
pull up the connector straight.

10
Wiring
2.4.3 Specification of main circuit terminal
2.4.4 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring.
200V class
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Name Description
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
AC power input
Connect to the commercial power supply.
Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter
(FR-HC and MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
R1/L11,
S1/L21
Power supply for
control circuit
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To retain the
alarm display and alarm output or when using the high power factor
converter (FR-HC and MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV), remove the jumpers from terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/
L21 and apply external power to these terminals.
Do not turn off the power supply for control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21) with the
main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may damage the
inverter. The circuit should be configured so that the main circuit power (R/
L1, S/L2, T/L3) is also turned off when the power supply for control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is off.
15K or less : 60VA, 18.5K or more : 80VA
P/+, PR
Brake resistor
connection
(22K or less)
Remove the jumper from terminals PR-PX (7.5K or less) and connect an
optional brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR.
For the 22K or less, connecting the resistor further provides regenerative
braking power.
P/+, N/-
Brake unit
connection
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU and MT-BU5), power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV), high power factor converter
(FR-HC and MT-HC) or power regeneration converter (MT-RC).
P/+, P1
DC reactor
connection
For the 55K or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ - P1 and
connect the DC reactor. (As a DC reactor is supplied with the 75K or
more as standard, be sure to connect the DC reactor.)
PR, PX
Built-in brake circuit
connection
When the jumper is connected across terminals PX-PR (initial status),
the built-in brake circuit is valid. (Provided for the 7.5K or less.)
Earth (Ground)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed
(grounded).
CAUTION
· When connecting a dedicated brake resistor (FR-ABR) and brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU) remove jumpers across terminals
PR-PX (7.5K or less). For details, refer to section 2 of Instruction Manual (applied).
FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K FR-A720-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+
PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
As this is an inside cover fixing screw,
do not remove it.
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
MotorPower supply
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Charge lamp
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
MotorPower
supply

11
Wiring
FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K
* Screw size of terminal R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, and PX is M4.
FR-A720-11K
FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K FR-A720-30K, 37K, 45K
FR-A720-55K FR-A720-75K, 90K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size
(M5)
Screw size (M5)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
MotorPower supply
* *
*
*
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
PR
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Power supply
IM
Motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
MotorPower supply
Screw size
(15K:M6, 18.5K, 22K:M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
MotorPower
supply
Screw size
(30K:M6, 37K/45K:M8)
Screw size
(30K:M8, 37K/45K:M10)
Power supply
IM
Motor
Screw size (M8)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
Screw size (M12)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4)R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M12)
Screw size
(M10)
Jumper
Charge lamp
MotorPower supply
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
DC reactor

12
Wiring
400V class
FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K
FR-A740-11K, 15K FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
FR-A740-30K, 37K, 45K FR-A740-55K
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR
PXR1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Charge lamp
Jumper
Screw size (M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper
MotorPower
supply
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PX
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size
(M4)
Jumper Jumper
Charge lamp
MotorPower supply
R1/L11 S1/L21
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
PR
Charge lamp
Jumper
Jumper
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size (M5)
Screw size (M5)
Power supply
IM
Motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
PR
R1/L11 S1/L21
IM
Screw size (M4)
Screw size (M6)
Screw size (M6)
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Power supply Motor
IM
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size(M4)
Power
supply
Motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size
(30K: M6, 37K/45K: M8)
Screw size (30K: M6, 37K/45K: M8)
IM
Jumper
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M4)
Power
supply
Motor
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
Screw size (M8) Screw size (M10) Screw size (M8)
Screw size (M8)

13
Wiring
FR-A740-75K, 90K FR-A740-110K, 132K
FR-A740-160K, 185K FR-A740-220K to 500K
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
DC reactor
Screw size (M4)
Power
supply
Motor
Jumper
Charge lamp
P/+
Screw size
(M10)
Screw size(M10)
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size
(M10)
Motor
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
Power supply
DC reactor
Screw size (M10)
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
P/+
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
Screw size (M12)
Screw size
(M10)
Motor
Screw size (M12)
(for option)
Power supply
DC reactor
IM
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-
R1/L11 S1/L21
P/+
P/+
Screw size (M4)
Jumper
Charge lamp
MotorPower supply
DC reactor
Screw size (M12)
Screw size (M10)

14
Wiring
CAUTION
· The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Never connect the power cable
to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter. (Phase sequence needs not to be
matched.)
· Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates
the motor in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
· When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the 220K or more, tighten a nut from the right
side of the conductor. When wiring two wires, place wires on both sides of the conductor. (Refer to
the drawing on the right.) For wiring, use bolts (nuts) provided with the inverter.
• Handling of the wiring cover
(FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K, FR-A740-18.5K, 22K)
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary
parts using a pair of long-nose pliers etc.
CAUTION
Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where
no wire is put through has been cut off (10mm or more),
protective structure (JEM1030) becomes an open type
(IP00).

15
Wiring
(1) Cable sizes etc., of the main control circuit terminals and earth (ground) terminals
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
200V class (when input power supply is 220V)
Applicable Inverter
Type
Terminal
Screw
Size *4
Tightening
Torque
N·m
Crimping
Terminal
Cable Sizes
HIV, etc. (mm2) *1 AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1
Earth
(Ground)
cable
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
Earth
(Ground)
cable
FR-A720-0.4K to
2.2K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
FR-A720-3.7K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-A720-5.5K M4-M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
FR-A720-7.5K M4-M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 14 6 8 16 10 16
FR-A720-11K M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-A720-15K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-A720-18.5K M8-M6 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
FR-A720-22K M8-M6 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
FR-A720-30K M8-M6 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 38 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-A720-37K M10-M8 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-A720-45K M10-M8 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 60 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-A720-55K M12-M8 24.5 100-12 100-12 100 100 100 60 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-A720-75K M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 125 125 38 250 250 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
FR-A720-90K M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 60 300 300 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
*1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable)
etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed
in an enclosure.
*2 The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the
ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
*3 For the 15K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C.
Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 18.5K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
*4 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding). For the 5.5K and 7.5K,
screw sizes are different (<R1/L11, S1/L21, PR, PX> - <R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, a screw for earthing (grounding)>). For the 18.5K or more,
screw sizes are different. (<R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W> - < a screw for earthing (grounding)>)

16
Wiring
400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
line voltage drop [V]=
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
Applicable Inverter
Type
Terminal
Screw
Size *4
Tightening
Torque
N·m
Crimping
Terminal
Cable Sizes
HIV, etc. (mm2
) *1 AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2
) *3
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W P/+, P1
Earth
(Ground)
Cable
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
U, V, W
Earth
(Ground)
Cable
FR-A740-0.4K to
3.7K
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
FR-A740-5.5K M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 2.5 2.5 4
FR-A740-7.5K M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
FR-A740-11K M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 8 10 10 6 6 10
FR-A740-15K M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10
FR-A740-18.5K M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 14 6 8 16 10 16
FR-A740-22K M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
FR-A740-30K M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-A740-37K M8 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
FR-A740-45K M8 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 1 2 50 50 25
FR-A740-55K M8 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-A740-75K M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 60 38 1/0 1/0 50 50 25
FR-A740-90K M10 14.7 60-10 60-10 60 60 80 38 3/0 3/0 50 50 25
FR-A740-110K M10-M12 14.7 80-10 80-10 80 80 80 38 3/0 3/0 70 70 35
FR-A740-132K M10-M12 14.7 100-10 100-10 100 100 100 38 4/0 4/0 95 95 50
FR-A740-160K M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 125 150 150 38 250 250 120 120 70
FR-A740-185K M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 150 150 150 38 300 300 150 150 95
FR-A740-220K M12-M10 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-A740-250K M12-M10 24.5 100-12 100-12 2×100 2×100 2×125 60 2×4/0 2×4/0 2×95 2×95 95
FR-A740-280K M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 2×125 2×125 2×125 60 2×250 2×250 2×120 2×120 120
FR-A740-315K M12-M10 24.5 150-12 150-12 2×150 2×150 2×150 100 2×300 2×300 2×150 2×150 150
FR-A740-355K M12-M10 24.5 C2-200 C2-200 2×200 2×200 2×200 100 2×350 2×350 2×185 2×185 2×95
FR-A740-400K M12-M10 24.5 C2-200 C2-200 2×200 2×200 2×200 100 2×400 2×400 2×185 2×185 2×95
FR-A740-450K M12-M10 24.5 C2-250 C2-250 2×250 2×250 2×250 100 2×500 2×500 2×240 2×240 2×120
FR-A740-500K M12-M10 24.5 C2-200 C2-250 3×200 2×250 3×200 2×100 2×500 2×500 2×240 2×240 2×120
*1 For the 55K or less, the cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 75K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene insulated cable) etc.) with
continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50°C or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
*2 For the 45K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
*3 For the 45K or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. Assumes
that the ambient temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
For the 55K or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
*4 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
For the 110K and 132K, screw sizes are different (<R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, a screw for earthing (grounding)> - <P/+ for option connection>)
For the 160K or more, screw sizes are different. (<R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W> - <a screw for earthing (grounding)>)
CAUTION
· Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
· Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
1000

17
Wiring
(2) Notes on earthing (grounding)
• Leakage currents flow in the inverter. To prevent an electric shock, the inverter and motor must be earthed (grounded). This
inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• Use the dedicated earth (ground) terminal to earth (ground) the inverter.
(Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
• Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in page
15, 16, and minimize the cable length. The earthing (grounding) point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
To be compliant with the European Directive (Low Voltage Directive), earth (ground) the inverter
according to the instructions on page 183.
(3) Total wiring length
The overall wiring length for connection of a single motor or multiple motors should be within the value in the table below.
(The wiring length should be 100m maximum for vector control.)
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
Take the following measures (1) or (2) in this case.
(1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
according to wiring length
(2) Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the 55K or less and the sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to
the 75K or more on the inverter output side.
(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21)
· Terminal screw size: M4
· Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
· Tightening torque: 1.5N·m
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting
(carrier frequency)
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K or more
2 (2kHz) or less 300m 500m 500m
3 to 15 (3kHz to 14.5kHz) 200m 300m 500m
Total wiring length (1.5K or more)
CAUTION
· Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault
of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function.
(For Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied). (When using an option sine
wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the 75K or more, set "25" (2.5kHz) in Pr. 72.)
For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the manual of each
option.
· Do not perform vector control with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) or sine wave filer (MT-BSL/BSC) connected.
500m or less
300m
300m
300m + 300m = 600m
Wiring Length
50m or less 50m to 100m exceeding 100m
Carrier frequency 14.5kHz or less 9kHz or less 4kHz or less

18
Wiring
(5) When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply
(separate power)
• FR-A720-0.4K to 3.7K, FR-A740-0.4K to 3.7K
• FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K, FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K
<Connection diagram> When the protected circuit is activated, opening of the electromagnetic
contactor (MC) on the inverter power supply side results in power loss in the
control circuit, disabling the alarm output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11
and S1/L21 are provided to hold an alarm signal. In this case, connect the
power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit to the
primary side of the MC.
1)Loosen the upper screws.
2)Remove the lower screws.
3)Remove the jumper
4)Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the lower terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).
1)Remove the upper screws.
3)Remove the jumper.
4)Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the upper terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).
Inverter
MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper
Main circuit terminal block
R1/L11
S1/L21
3)
1)
2)
4)
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
R/L1
3)
4)
1)
2)
Main circuit
terminal block
S1/L21
R1/L11
S/
L2 T/
L3
R/
L1
R1/L11
S1/L21

19
Wiring
• FR-A720-11K or more, FR-A740-11K or more
1)Remove the upper screws.
3)Pull the jumper toward you to
remove.
4)Connect the separate power supply
cable for the control circuit to the
upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).
Never connect the power cable to
the terminals in the lower stand.
Doing so will damage the inverter.
CAUTION
· Do not turn off the control power (terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21) with the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on. Doing so may
damage the inverter.
· Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21 removed when supplying power from
other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
· The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC.
· The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter capacity.
· When the power supply used with the control circuit is different from the one used with the main circuit, make up a circuit which will
switch off the main circuit power supply terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when the control circuit power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21
are switched off.
· If the main circuit power is switched off (for 0.1s or more) then on again, the inverter resets and an alarm output will not be held.
S1/L21
R1/L11
3)
4)
1)
2)
Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit
Power supply terminal block
for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3
R1/
L11
S1/
L21 Power supply
terminal block
for the control circuit
Main power supply
MC
VU W
FR-A720-11K,
FR-A740-11K, 15K
FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K,
FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
FR-A720-30K or more,
FR-A740-30K or more
11K or less 15K or less 18.5K or more
200V class 60VA 80VA 80VA
400V class 60VA 60VA 80VA

20
Wiring
2.4.5 Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to section 4 of
Instruction Manual (applied).)
(1) Input signals
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Description
Rated
Specifications
Refer to
page
Contactinput
STF
Forward
rotation start
Turn on the STF signal to start forward
rotation and turn it off to stop.
When the STF and STR
signals are turned on
simultaneously,thestop
command is given. Input resistance
4.7kΩ
Voltage at
opening: 21 to
27VDC
Contacts at
short-circuited: 4
to 6mADC
78
STR
Reverse
rotation start
Turn on the STR signal to start reverse
rotation and turn it off to stop.
STOP
Start self-
holding
selection
Turn on the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
RH,
RM, RL
Multi-speed
selection
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH,
RM and RL signals.
79
JOG
Jog mode
selection
Turn on the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting) and
turn on the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation.
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
Pulse train
input
JOG terminal can be used as pulse train input terminal. To use as
pulse train input terminal, the Pr. 291 setting needs to be changed.
(maximum input pulse: 100kpulses/s)
Input resistance
2kΩ
Contacts at
short-circuited: 8
to 13mADC
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
RT
Second
function
selection
Turn on the RT signal to select second function.
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and
"second V/F (base frequency)" are set, turning on the RT signal
selects these functions.
Input resistance
4.7kΩ
Voltage at
opening: 21 to
27VDC
Contacts at
short-circuited: 4
to 6mADC
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
MRS Output stop
Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter
output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by
electromagnetic brake.
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
RES Reset
Used to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is
activated.
Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it off.
Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set
to enabled only at an inverter alarm occurrence. Recover about
1s after reset is cancelled.
129
AU
Terminal 4 input
selection
Terminal 4 is made valid only when the AU signal is turned on. (The
frequency setting signal can be set between 4 and 20mADC.)
Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
83
PTC input
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of
the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC
switch to PTC.
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
CS
Selection of
automatic
restart after
instantaneous
power failure
When the CS signal is left on, the inverter restarts automatically at
power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this
operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
(Refer to Pr. 57 Restart coasting time in section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
SD
Contact input
common (sink)
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and
terminal FM.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC
terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
-------------------- —
PC
External
transistor
common,
24VDC power
supply, contact
input common
(source)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output),
such as a programmable controller (PLC), when sink logic is
selected, connect the external power supply common for
transistor output to this terminal to prevent a malfunction caused
by undesirable currents.
Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
When source logic has been selected, this terminal serves as a
contact input common.
Power supply
voltage range
19.2 to 28.8VDC
Current
consumption
100mA
24

21
Wiring
*1 Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage signal with voltage/current input switch on (current input is selected) or a current signal with switch off (voltage input is
selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of signal output devices.
(2) Output signals
Frequencysetting
10E
Frequency
setting power
supply
When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial
status, connect it to terminal 10.
Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it
to terminal 10E. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection in section 4 of
10VDC
Permissible load
current 10mA
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
10
5VDC
Permissible load
current 10mA
76, 81
2
Frequency
setting
(voltage)
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input
and output proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch from among input 0
to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA.
Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select
current input (0 to 20mA). *1
Voltage input:
Input resistance
10kΩ ± 1kΩ
Maximum
permissible
voltage 20VDC
Current input:
Input resistance
245Ω ± 5Ω
Maximum
permissible
current 30mA
76, 81
4
Frequency
setting
(current)
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the
maximum output frequency at 20mA makes input and output
proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is
on (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch from among
input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. Set
the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V). *1 Use Pr. 858 to switch terminal
functions.
77, 83
1
Frequency
setting
auxiliary
Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal
2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr. 73 to switch between the
input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting).
Use Pr. 868 to switch terminal functions.
Input resistance
10kΩ ± 1kΩ
Maximum
permissible
voltage ± 20VDC
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
5
Frequency
setting
common
Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
and analog output terminal AM. Do not earth (ground).
-------------------- ------
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Description
Rated
Specifications
Refer to
page
Relay
A1,
B1,
C1
Relay output 1
(alarm output)
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter
protective function has activated and the output stopped.
Abnormal: No conduction across B-C (Across A-C Continuity),
Normal: Across B-C Continuity (No conduction across A-C)
Contact capacity:
230VAC 0.3A
(Power
factor=0.4)
30VDC 0.3A
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
A2,
B2,
C2
Relay output 2 1 changeover contact output
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Description
Rated
Specifications
Refer to
page
Voltage/current
input switch
24
switch1
switch2

22
Wiring
*1 Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on (conducts).
High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).
*2 Not output during inverter reset.
(3) Communication
Opencollector
RUN
Inverter
running
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or
higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched
high during stop or DC injection brake operation.*1
Permissible load
24VDC (27VDC
maximum) 0.1A
(A voltage drop is
2.8V maximum
when the signal is
on.)
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
SU
Up to
frequency
Switched low when the output
frequency reaches within the range of
±10% (initial value) of the set frequency.
Switched high during acceleration/
deceleration and at a stop. *1
Alarm code (4bit)
output
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
OL
Overload
warning
Switched low when stall prevention is
activated by the stall prevention
function. Switched high when stall
prevention is cancelled. *1
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
IPF
Instantaneous
power failure
Switched low when an instantaneous
power failure and under voltage
protections are activated. *1
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
FU
Frequency
detection
Switched low when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the
preset detected frequency and high when
less than the preset detected frequency. *1
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
SE
Open collector
output common
Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU -------------------- -----
Pulse
FM
For meter
Select one e.g. output frequency from
monitor items. *2
The output signal is proportional to the
magnitude of the corresponding
monitoring item.
Output item:
Output frequency
(initial setting)
Permissible load
current 2mA
1440pulses/s at
60Hz
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
NPN open
collector output
Signals can be output
from the open
collector terminals by
setting Pr. 291.
Maximum output
pulse: 50kpulses/s
Permissible load
current : 80mA
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
Analog
AM
Analog signal
output
Output item:
Output frequency
(initial setting)
Output signal 0 to
10VDC
Permissible load
current 1mA
(load impedance
10kΩ or more)
Resolution 8 bit
Section4of
Instruction
Manual
(applied)
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Description
Referto
page
RS-485
--------------------
PU
connector
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
. Conforming standard : EIA-485 (RS-485)
. Transmission format : Multidrop
. Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
. Overall length : 500m
26
RS-485terminals
TXD+ Inverter
transmission
terminal
With the RS-485 terminals, communication can be made through RS-485.
Conforming standard : EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format : Multidrop link
Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
Overall length : 500m
26
TXD-
RXD+ Inverter
reception
terminalRXD-
SG Earth (Ground)
USB
--------------------
USB
connector
The FR-Configurator can be performed by connecting the inverter to the personnel
computer through USB.
Interfase:Conforms to USB1.1
Transmission speed:12Mbps
Connector:USB B connector (B receptacle)
27
Type
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal
Name
Description
Rated
Specifications
Refer to
page

23
Wiring
2.4.6 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the
other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
1)Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2)Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to
source logic (SOURCE).
3)Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
2. While power is on, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.
Jumper connector

24
Wiring
4)Sink logic and source logic
⋅ In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
⋅ In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
• When using an external power supply for transistor output
⋅ Sink logic type
Use terminal PC as a common terminal to prevent a
malfunction caused by undesirable current. (Do not
connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0V of
the external power supply. When using terminals PC-
SD as a 24VDC power supply, do not install a power
supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so
may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current.)
⋅ Source logic type
When using an external power supply for transistor
output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent
misoperation caused by undesirable current.
Current
PC
STF
R
STR
R
Source logic
Source
connector
Current
SD
STF
R
STR
R
Sink
connector
Sink logic
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when source logic is selected
DC input (source type)
<Example: AX80>
24VDC
RUN
SE
1
9
R
Inverter
R
Current flow
+ -+-
DC input (sink type)
<Example: AX40>
Inverter
24VDC
RUN
SE
1
9
R
R
Current flow
AY40 type
transistor
output unit 1
2
910
24VDC SD
PC
STR
STF
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
9
Current flow
AY80 type
transistor
output unit
9
1
2
10
PC
STF
STR
SD
Inverter
24VDC
(SD)
24VDC
Current flow

25
Wiring
2.4.7 Wiring of control circuit
(1) Control circuit terminal layout
(2) Wiring instructions
1) Terminals 5, SD and SE are common to the I/O signals and isolated from each other. Do not earth (ground). Avoid
connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
2) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and
power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
3) Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to
prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the
control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
4) Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
5) Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
6) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2
gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2
or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or
the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
7) The wiring length should be 30m (200m for terminal FM) maximum.
Terminal screw size: M3.5
Tightening torque: 1.2N·m
Wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more
For wiring of the control circuit of the 75K or more, separate away from wiring of the main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 10E 10 2 5 4
1AMSDRESMRSSTOPAURTRHRMRL
PCCSJOGSTRSTFSDSDFUOLIPFSURUNSE
FM
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts
<Wiring>
Rubber bush
(view from the inside)
Make cuts along the lines inside with
a cutter knife and such.

26
Wiring
2.4.8 When connecting the operation panel using a connection cable
When connecting the operation panel (FR-DU07) to the inverter using a cable, the operation panel can be mounted
on the enclosure surface and operationality improves.
2.4.9 RS-485 terminal block
CAUTION
Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN port, FAX modem socket or telephone connector.
The inverter and machine could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
REMARKS
⋅ Refer to page 5 for removal method of the operation panel.
⋅ When using a commercially available connector and cable as a parameter unit connection cable, refer to section 2 of
Instruction Manual (applied).
⋅ The inverter can be connected to the computer and FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
⋅ Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)
⋅ Transmission format: Multidrop link
⋅ Communication speed: MAX 38400bps
⋅ Overall length: 500m
⋅ Connection cable:Twisted pair cable
(4 paires)
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2 )(option)
Operation panel(FR-DU07)
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP)(option)
RXDRDA1
(RXD1+)
RDB1
(RXD1-)
RDA2
(RXD2+)
RDB2
(RXD2-)
SDA1
(TXD1+)
SDB1
(TXD1-)
SDA2
(TXD2+)
SDB2
(TXD2-)
P5S
(VCC)
SG
(GND)
P5S
(VCC)
SG
(GND) VCC
TXD
OPEN
100Ω
Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

27
Wiring
2.4.10 Communication operation
2.4.11 USB connector
A personal computer and an inverter can be connected with a USB (Ver1. 1) cable.
You can perform parameter setting and monitoring with the FR-Configurator.
•USB communication specifications
Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can
perform communication operation from a personal
computer etc. When the PU connector is connected
with a personal, FA or other computer by a
communication cable, a user program can run and
monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
operation), communication can be performed with the
PU connector and RS-485 terminal.
For the Modbus RTU protocol, communication can be
performed with the RS-485 terminal.
For further details, refer to section 4 of Instruction
Manual (applied).
Interfase Conforms to USB1.1
Transmission speed 12Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5m
Connector USB B connector (B receptacle)
Power supply Self-power supply
PLC
Multidrop link
(32 inverters maximum
are connectable)
Inverter Inverter Inverter
USB cable USB connector
Place a flat-blade screwdriver,
etc. in a slot and push up the
cover to open.
Removal of cover

28
Wiring
2.4.12 Connection of motor with encoder (vector control)
Orientation control and encoder feedback control, and speed control, torque control and position control by full-scale
vector control operation can be performed using a motor with encoder and a plug-in option FR-A7AP.
(1) Structure of the FR-A7AP
(2) Terminals of the FR-A7AP
Terminal Terminal Name Description
PA1 Encoder A-phase signal input terminal
A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.
PA2 Encoder A-phase inverse signal input terminal
PB1 Encoder B-phase signal input terminal
PB2 Encoder B-phase inverse signal input terminal
PZ1 Encoder Z-phase signal input terminal
PZ2 Encoder Z-phase inversion signal input terminal
PG Encoder power supply (positive side) input terminal Input terminal for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply (5V, 12V, 15V, 24V) and the
encoder power cable.SD Encoder power supply ground terminal
PIN
Not used.
PO
Front view Rear view
Mounting
hole
Mounting
hole
Mounting
hole
Encoder specification selection switch (SW1)
Used to change the specification of encoder
(differential line driver/complementary).
Switch for manufacturer
setting (SW3)
Do not change from initially-
set status (1, 2:OFF ).
Terminating resistor selection
switch (SW2)
Switch ON/OFF of the internal
terminating resistor.
CON2 connector
Not used.
Terminal
block
Connector
Connect to the inverter
option connector.
Terminal layout
PA2
PB2
PZ2
SD
SD
PO
PA1
PB1
PZ1
PG
PG
PIN
1
2
3
4
O
N
1
2
O
N
1
2
O
N
SW2
SW1
LED1
LED2
LED3
SW3
FR-A7AP
PIN and PO are
not used.
(Refer to page 29.)
(Refer to page 29.)

29
Wiring
(3) Switches of the FR-A7AP
• Encoder specification selection switch (SW1)
Select either differential line driver or complementary
It is initially set to the differential line driver. Switch its position according
to output circuit.
• Terminating resistor selection switch (SW2)
Select ON/OFF of the internal terminating resistor. Set the switch to ON
(initial status) when an encoder output type is differential line driver and
set to OFF when complimentary.
ON : with internal terminating resistor (initial status)
OFF: without internal terminating resistor
• Motor used and switch setting
• Encoder specification
REMARKS
· Set all swithces to the same setting (ON/OFF).
· If the encoder output type is differential line driver, set the terminating resistor
switch to the "OFF" position when sharing the same encoder with other unit (NC
(numerical controller), etc) or a terminating resistor is connected to other unit.
Motor
Encoder Specification
Selection Switch (SW1)
Terminating Resistor
Selection Switch (SW2)
Power
Specifications *2
Mitsubishi standard motor with encoder
Mitsubishi high efficiency motor with
encoder
SF-JR Differential ON 5V
SF-HR Differential ON 5V
Others *1 *1 *1
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor with
encoder
SF-JRCA Differential ON 5V
SF-HRCA Differential ON 5V
Others *1 *1 *1
Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU Complimentary OFF 12V
Other manufacturer motor with encoder – *1 *1 *1
*1 Set according to the motor (encoder) used.
*2 Choose a power supply (5V/12V/15V/24V) for encoder according to the encoder used.
CAUTION
SW3 switch is for manufacturer setting. Do not change the setting.
Item Encoder for SF-JR Encoder for SF-V5RU
Resolution 1024 Pulse/Rev 2048 Pulse/Rev
Power supply
voltage
5VDC±10% 12VDC±10%
Current
consumption
150mA 150mA
Output signal form
A, B phases (90° phase shift)
Z phase: 1 pulse/rev
A, B phases (90° phase shift)
Z phase: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Differential line driver 74LS113 equivalent Complimentary
Output voltage
H level: 2.4V or more
L level: 0.5V or less
H level: "Power supply for encoder-3V" or more
L level: 3V or less
CAUTION
Encoder with resolution of 1000 to 4096 pulse/rev is recommended.
Complementary
Differential line
driver (initial status)
1
2
3
4
O
N
1
2
O
NSW2
SW1
SW3
FR-A7AP
Internal terminating
resistor-ON
(initial status)
Internal terminating resistor-OFF
1
2
3
4
O
N
1
2
O
NSW2
SW1
SW3
FR-A7AP

30
Wiring
(4) Encoder Cable
• When using the dedicated encoder cable (FR-JCBL, FR-V5CBL, etc.) for the conventional motor, cut the crimpling
terminal of the encoder cable and strip its sheath to make its cables loose.
Also, protect the shielded cable of the twisted pair shielded cable to ensure that it will not make contact with the
conductive area.
Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not
solder it.
Use a bar terminal as necessary.
Connection terminal compatibility table
SF-JR Motor with Encoder SF-V5RU, SF-THY
* As the terminal block of the FR-A7AP is an insertion type, earth cables need to be modified. (See below)
REMARKS
Information on bar terminals
Introduced products (as of September, 2006): Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
Motor SF-V5RU, SF-THY SF-JR/HR/JRCA/HRCA (with Encoder)
Encoder cable FR-V7CBL FR-JCBL
FR-A7AP terminal
PA1 PA PA
PA2 Keep this open. PAR
PB1 PB PB
PB2 Keep this open. PBR
PZ1 PZ PZ
PZ2 Keep this open. PZR
PG PG 5E
SD SD AG2
L
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2mm2 MS3057-12A
Earth cable
MS3106B20-29S
60mm
Approx. 140mm
Type Length L (m)
FR-JCBL5 5
FR-JCBL15 15
FR-JCBL30 30
*
PZ2
PZ1
PB2
PB1
PA2
PA1
PG
SD
P
B
N
A
R
C
H
K
Encoder
2mm2
A B
C
D
EK
F
GH
J
L
M
S
N
R
PT
MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side)
Positioning keyway
FR-A700
(FR-A7AP)
L MS3106B20-29S
Earth cable
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2mm2
MS3057-12A
Encoder side
connector
Inverter side
60mm
11mm
Type Length L (m)
FR-V7CBL5 5
FR-V7CBL15 15
FR-V7CBL30 30
⋅ A P clip for earthing (grounding) a
shielded cable is provided.
PZ2
PZ1
PB2
PB1
PA2
PA1
SD
PG
G
F
D
C
B
A
R
S
Encoder
2mm2
FR-A700
(FR-A7AP)
A
B
C
D
EK
F
GH
J
L
M
S
N
R
PT
MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side)
Positioning keyway
Cable stripping size
5mm
⋅ Bar terminal crimping tool: CRIMPFOX ZA3 (Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.)
Terminal Screw
Size
Bar Terminal Model
(with insulation sleeve)
Bar Terminal Model
(without insulation sleeve) Wire Size (mm2)
M2 Al 0.5-6WH A 0.5-6 0.3 to 0.5
When using the bar terminal (without insulation sleeve),
use care so that the twisted wires do not come out.

31
Wiring
(5) Wiring
• Speed control
• Torque control
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5V differential line driver
Vector control dedicated motor
(SF-V5RU, SF-THY),
12V complimentary
Standard motor with encoder (SF-JR), 5V differential line driver
Vector control dedicated motor
(SF-V5RU, SF-THY),
12V complimentary
*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
Speed control and torque control are properly performed even without connecting Z phase.
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio should be 1:1.
*3 Earth (Ground) the shielded cable of the encoder cable to the enclosure with a P clip, etc. (Refer to page 33.)
*4 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to off position. (Refer to page 29.)
*5 A separate power supply of 5V/12V/15V/24V is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
*6 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL and FR-A7AP, refer to page 30.
*7 For the fan of the 7.5kW or less dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase. (200V/50Hz, 200 to 230V/60Hz)
*8 Assign OH (external thermal input) signal to the terminal CS. (Set "7" in Pr. 186 )
Connect a 2W1kΩ resistor between the terminal PC and CS (OH). Install the resistor pushing against the
bottom part of the terminal block so as to avoid a contact with other cables.
Refer to section 4 of the instruction manual (applied) for details of Pr. 186 CS terminal function selection.
Three-phase
AC power supply
MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
SF-JR motor
with encoder
U
V
W
U
V
W
E
C
*3
*1
*2
*4
*6
R
PA1
FR-A7AP
PA2
PB1
PB2
PZ1
PZ2
PG
PG
SD
SD
Differential
Terminating
resistor ON
OFF
Complimentary
A
N
B
P
H
K
IM
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
SD
Encoder
Earth
(Ground)
Inverter
10
2
2
3
1
1
Frequency command
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ 5
(+)
(-) 5VDC power supply *5
(+) (-)
Torque limit
command
( 10V)
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
A
B
C
G1
G2
MCCB
FAN
*7
CS(OH)
SD
PC
2W1kΩ
Three-phase
AC power supply
External
thermal
relay input *8
Thermal relay
protector
U
V
W
U
V
W
E
IM
Inverter
Earth
(Ground)
*4
*3
PA1
FR-A7AP
PA2
PB1
PB2
PZ1
PZ2
*1A
*2
B
C
D
F
G
S
R
(+) (-)
Differential
Terminating
resistor
ON
OFF
Complimentary
Encoder
12VDC power supply *5
PG
PG
SD
SD
*6
Three-phase
AC power supply
MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
SF-JR motor
with encoder
U
V
W
U
V
W
E
C
*3
*1
*2
*4
*6
R
PA1
FR-A7AP
PA2
PB1
PB2
PZ1
PZ2
PG
PG
SD
SD
Differential
Terminating
resistor ON
OFF
Complimentary
A
N
B
P
H
K
IM
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
STF
STR
SD
Encoder
Earth
(Ground)
Inverter
10
2
2
3
1
1
Speed limit command
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ 5
(+)
(-) 5VDC
power supply *5(+) (-)
Torque command
( 10V)
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
A
B
C
G1
G2
MCCB
FAN
*7
CS(OH)
SD
PC
2W1kΩ
Three-phase
AC power supply
External
thermal
relay input *8
Thermal relay
protector
U
V
W
U
V
W
E
IM
Inverter
Earth
(Ground)
*4
*3
PA1
FR-A7AP
PA2
PB1
PB2
PZ1
PZ2
*1A
*2
B
C
D
F
G
S
R
(+) (-)
Differential
Terminating
resistor
ON
OFF
Complimentary
Encoder
12VDC power supply *5
PG
PG
SD
SD
*6
CS(OH)
Resistor (2W1kΩ)
PC
Control circuit
terminal block

32
Wiring
• Position control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY), 12V complimentary
*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used.
Position control by pulse train input is properly performed even without connecting Z phase.
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio should be 1:1.
*3 Earth (Ground) the shielded cable of the encoder cable to the enclosure with a P clip, etc. (Refer to page 33.)
*4 For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switch to off position. (Refer to page 29.)
*5 A separate power supply of 5V/12V/15V/24V is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
*6 For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL and FR-A7AP, refer to page 30.
*7 Assign the function using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184, Pr. 187 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
*8 When position control is selected, terminal JOG function is made invalid and conditional position pulse train input
terminal becomes valid.
*9 Assign the function using Pr. 190 to Pr. 194 (output terminal function selection).
*10 For the fan of the 7.5kW or less dedicated motor, the power supply is single phase. (200V/50Hz, 200 to 230V/60Hz)
*11 Assign OH (external thermal input) signal to the terminal CS. (Set "7" in Pr. 186 )
Connect a 2W1kΩ resistor between the terminal PC and CS (OH). Install the
resistor pushing against the bottom part of the terminal block so as to avoid a
contact with other cables.
Refer to section 4 of the instruction manual (applied) for details of Pr. 186 CS terminal
function selection.
SF-V5RU, SF-THY
A
B
C
G1
G2
MCCB
FAN
*10
CS(OH)
SD
PC
2W1kΩ
Three-phase AC
power supply
Earth
(ground) Thermal
protectorExternal thermal
relay input *11
1
5
(+)
(-)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
*4 *6
*3
PA1
FR-A7AP
PA2
PB1
PB2
PZ1
PZ2
Forward stroke end
Reverse stroke end
Pre-excitation/servo on
Clear signal
Pulse train
Sign signal
Preparation ready signal
STR
LX *7
CLR *7CLEAR
JOG *8
NP *7
*1
OFF
U
V
W
U
V
W
E
A
*2
B
PA1
PA2
PB1
PB2
PZ1
PZ2
C
D
F
G
S
R
IM
Encoder
Inverter
Positioning unit
MELSEQ-Q QD75P1
12VDC
power supply(+) (-) *5
PULSE F
PULSE R
PULSE COM
CLEAR COM
RDY COM
READY
PC
RDY *9
SE
FLS
RLS
DOG
STOP
COM
24VDC power supply
Three-phase AC
power supply
Torque limit command
(±10V)
ON
Differential
line driver
Complimentary
Terminating
resistor
PG
PG
SD
SD
MCCB
CS(OH)
Resistor (2W1kΩ)
PC
Control circuit
terminal block

33
Wiring
(6) Instructions for encoder cable wiring
• Use twisted pair shield cables (0.2mm2
or larger) to connect the FR-A7AP and position detector. Cables to terminals
PG and SD should be connected in paralell or be larger in size according to the cable length.
To protect the cables from noise, run them away from any source of noise (e.g. the main circuit and power supply
voltage).
* When differential line driver is set and a wiring length is 30m or more
The wiring length can be extended to 100m by slightly increasing the power by 5V (approx. 5.5V) using six or more cables with gauge size of 0.2mm2
in parallel or a cable with gauge size of 1.25mm2
or more. Note that the voltage applied should be within power supply specifications of encoder.
• To reduce noise of the encoder cable, earth (ground) the encoder
shielded cable to the enclosure (as near as the inverter) with a P clip or
U clip made of metal.
(7) Parameter for encoder (Pr. 359, Pr. 369)
(8) Motor for vector control and parameter setting
Wiring Length Paralell Connection Larger-Size Cable
Within 10m At least 2 cables
Cable gauge
0.2mm2
0.4mm2
or larger
Within 20m At least 4 cables 0.75mm2 or larger
Within 100m * At least 6 cables 1.25mm2 or larger
REMARKS
· For details of the optional encoder dedicated cable (FR-JCBL/FR-V7CBL), refer
to page 30.
· The FR-V7CBL is provided with a P clip for earthing (grounding) shielded cable.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
Description
359
Encoder rotation
direction
1
0
1
369
Number of encoder
pulses
1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of encoder pulses output.
Set the number of pulses before it is multiplied by 4.
The above parameters can be set when the FR-A7AP (option) is mounted.
Motor Name
Pr. 9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
Pr. 71
Applied motor
Pr. 80
Motor capacity
Pr. 81
Number of motor
poles
Pr. 359
Encoderrotation
direction
Pr. 369
Number of
encoder pulses
Mitsubishi standard
motor
SF-JR Motor rated current 0 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024
SF-JR 4P 1.5kW
or less
Motor rated current 20 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024
SF-HR Motor rated current 40 Motor capacity Number of motor poles 1 1024
Others Motor rated current 3 *1 Motor capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
Mitsubishi constant-
torque motor
SF-JRCA 4P Motor rated current 1 Motor capacity 4 1 1024
SF-HRCA 4P Motor rated current 50 Motor capacity 4 1 1024
Others Motor rated current 13 *1 Motor capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
Mitsubishi vector
control dedicated
motor
SF-V5RU
(1500r/min series)
0 *3 30 Motor capacity 4 1 2048
SF-THY 0 *3 33 *1 Motor capacity 4 1 2048
Other manufacturer's
standard motor
— Motor rated current 3 *1 Motor capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
constant torque motor
— Motor rated current 13 *1 Motor capacity Number of motor poles *2 *2
Values in the bolded frame are initial values.
*1 Offline auto tuning is necessary. (Refer to page 62)
*2 Set this parameter according to the motor (encoder) used.
*3 Use thermal protector input provided with the motor.
Encoder cable
Shield
P clip
Earthing (grounding) example using a P clip
Forward rotation is clockwise
rotation when viewed from A.
A
Encoder
CW
A
Encoder
CCW
Forward rotation is counterclockwise
rotation when viewed from A.

34
Wiring
(9) Combination with a vector control dedicated motor
Refer to the table below when using with a vector control dedicated motor.
• Combination with the SF-V5RU and SF-THY
• Combination with the SF-V5RU1, 3, 4 and SF-THY
Models surrounded by black borders and 400V class are developed upon receipt of order.
*1 The maximum speed is 2400r/min.
*2 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400r/min or more.)
*3 90% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 1000r/min or more.)
Voltage 200V class 400V class
Rated speed 1500r/min
Base frequency 50Hz
Maximum speed 3000r/min
Motor capacity
Motor frame
number
Motor type Inverter type
Motor frame
number
1.5kW 90L SF-V5RU1K FR-A720-2.2K 90L SF-V5RUH1K FR-A740-2.2K
2.2kW 100L SF-V5RU2K FR-A720-3.7K 100L SF-V5RUH2K FR-A740-2.2K
3.7kW 112M SF-V5RU3K FR-A720-5.5K 112M SF-V5RUH3K FR-A740-3.7K
5.5kW 132S SF-V5RU5K FR-A720-7.5K 132S SF-V5RUH5K FR-A740-7.5K
7.5kW 132M SF-V5RU7K FR-A720-11K 132M SF-V5RUH7K FR-A740-11K
11kW 160M SF-V5RU11K FR-A720-15K 160M SF-V5RUH11K FR-A740-15K
15kW 160L SF-V5RU15K FR-A720-18.5K 160L SF-V5RUH15K FR-A740-18.5K
18.5kW 180M SF-V5RU18K FR-A720-22K 180M SF-V5RUH18K FR-A740-22K
22kW 180M SF-V5RU22K FR-A720-30K 180M SF-V5RUH22K FR-A740-30K
30kW 200L *2 SF-V5RU30K FR-A720-37K 200L *2 SF-V5RUH30K FR-A740-37K
55kW 225S *1 SF-V5RU55K FR-A720-75K 225S *1 SF-V5RUH55K FR-A740-75K
75kW 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-90K 250MD SF-THY FR-A740-90K
90kW — — — 250MD SF-THY FR-A740-110K
110kW — — — 280MD SF-THY FR-A740-132K
132kW — — — 280MD SF-THY FR-A740-160K
160kW — — — 280MD SF-THY FR-A740-185K
200kW — — — 280L SF-THY FR-A740-220K
250kW — — — 315H SF-THY FR-A740-280K
SF-V5RU 1 (1:2) SF-V5RU 3 (1:3) SF-V5RU 4 (1:4)
Voltage 200V class
Rated speed 1000r/min 1000r/min 500r/min
Base
frequency
33.33Hz 33.33Hz 16.6Hz
Maximum
speed
2000r/min 3000r/min 2000r/min
Motor
capacity
Motor
frame
number
Motor
frame
number
Motor
frame
number
1.5kW 100L SF-V5RU1K1 FR-A720-2.2K 112M SF-V5RU1K3 FR-A720-2.2K 132M SF-V5RU1K4 FR-A720-2.2K
2.2kW 112M SF-V5RU2K1 FR-A720-3.7K 132S SF-V5RU2K3 FR-A720-3.7K 160M SF-V5RU2K4 FR-A720-3.7K
3.7kW 132S SF-V5RU3K1 FR-A720-5.5K 132M SF-V5RU3K3 FR-A720-5.5K 160L SF-V5RU3K4 FR-A720-7.5K
5.5kW 132M SF-V5RU5K1 FR-A720-7.5K 160M SF-V5RU5K3 FR-A720-7.5K 180L SF-V5RU5K4 FR-A720-7.5K
7.5kW 160M SF-V5RU7K1 FR-A720-11K 160L SF-V5RU7K3 FR-A720-11K 200L SF-V5RU7K4 FR-A720-11K
11kW 160L SF-V5RU11K1 FR-A720-15K 180M SF-V5RU11K3 FR-A720-15K 225S SF-V5RU11K4 FR-A720-15K
15kW 180M SF-V5RU15K1 FR-A720-18.5K 180L SF-V5RU15K3 FR-A720-18.5K 225S SF-V5RU15K4 FR-A720-22K
18.5kW 180L SF-V5RU18K1 FR-A720-22K 200L SF-V5RU18K3 FR-A720-22K 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-22K
22kW 200L SF-V5RU22K1 FR-A720-30K 200L SF-V5RU22K3 FR-A720-30K 280MD SF-THY FR-A720-30K
30kW 200L*3 SF-V5RU30K1 FR-A720-37K 225S*1 SF-V5RU30K3 FR-A720-37K 280MD SF-THY FR-A720-37K
37kW 225S SF-V5RU37K1 FR-A720-45K 250MD*1 SF-THY FR-A720-45K 280MD SF-THY FR-A720-45K
45kW 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-55K 250MD*1 SF-THY FR-A720-55K 280MD SF-THY FR-A720-55K
55kW 250MD SF-THY FR-A720-75K 280MD*1 SF-THY FR-A720-75K 280L SF-THY FR-A720-75K

35
Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
2.5 Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
( Refer to page 3 for selection.)
1)To release the inverter from the power supply when the inverter's protective function is activated or when the drive is
not functioning (e.g. emergency stop operation).
When cycle operation or heavy-duty operation is performed with an optional brake resistor connected, overheat and
burnout of the electrical-discharge resistor can be prevented if a regenerative brake transistor is damaged due to
insufficient heat capacity of the electrical-discharge resistor and excess regenerative brake duty.
2)To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3)To reset the inverter for an extended period of time
The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little power. When stopping the inverter for an
extended period of time, powering off the inverter will save power slightly.
4)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work
The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3MC for the inverter input side
current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.
(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop.
When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and
such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to
use bypass-inverter switchover operation Pr. 135 to Pr. 139 (section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied)).
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush currents at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times. (For
the 200V class 37K or more, switching life is about 500,000)), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn on/off the
inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
• Inverter start/stop circuit example
As shown on the left, always use the start signal (ON or
OFF across terminals STF or STR-SD) to make a start
or stop.
*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down
transformer.
*2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 of the
control circuit to the primary side of the MC to hold an
alarm signal when the inverter's protective circuit is
activated. At this time, remove jumpers across terminals R/
L1-R1/L11 and S/L2-S1/L21. (Refer to page 18 for removal
of the jumper.)
Power
supply
MCCB
RA
U
V
A1
B1
C1
W
To the
motor
Inverter
MC
STF(STR)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
OFF ON
MC
Stop
Operation
RA
MC
Operation preparation
Start/Stop
RA
MC
T *1
*2
SD

36
Precautions for use of the inverter
2.6 Precautions for use of the inverter
The FR-A700 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method
may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in
an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 15 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum.
(The wiring length should be 100m maximum for vector control.)
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast response current limit function may be reduced or the equipment connected to
the inverter output side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity
of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 17.)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize
interference.
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices is
installed, immediately remove it.
(8) Before starting wiring or other work after the inverter is operated, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has
been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high
voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and inter-phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on.
Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter.
(11) Across P/+ and PR terminals, connect only an external regenerative brake discharge resistor.
Do not connect a mechanical brake.
(12) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Application of permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuit and incorrect polarity may damage the I/O terminal.
Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short
terminals 10E-5.
(13) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and
MC2 which are used for electronic bypass.
When the wiring is incorrect or if there is an electronic
bypass circuit as shown on the right, the inverter will be
damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to
arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering
caused by a sequence error.
(Commercial operation can not be performed with the vector
dedicated motor (SF-V5RU, SF-THY).)
(Refer to page 9)
(Refer to page 8)
Power
supply
Inverter
Undesirable current
MC2
MC1
Interlock
U
V
W
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
IM

37
When using the high-duty brake
resistor (FR-ABR)
(14) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the
inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(15) Instructions for overload operation
When performing an operation of frequent start/stop with the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element
of the inverter will repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal
fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting
current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and
the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough allowance for current (up to 2 rank larger in
capacity).
(16) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
(17) A motor with encoder is necessary for vector control. In addition, connect the encoder directly to the backlash-free motor
shaft. (An encoder is not necessary for real sensorless vector control.)
2.7 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
• When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, the wiring sequence as shown in the following diagrams is
recommended to prevent overheating and burnout of the brake resistor.
Note that the built-in brake resistor need not be removed. The leads of the built-in brake resistor need not be
disconnected from the terminals.
*1Remove the jumper from across the PR-PX terminals of the inverter. *1 This disables (switches off) the built-in brake resistor. When you use the
11K or more inverter, you need not remove the jumper since that inverter does not have the PX terminals. (Refer to the instruction manual of
the inverter.)
*2Refer to the following table for the thermal relay model number and to the following diagram for connection. (When using the 11K or more,
always install a thermal relay.)
Power
Supply
Voltage
High-duty Brake
Resistor
Thermal Relay Type
(Mitsubishi product)
Contact Rating
200V
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A
AC110V 5A,
AC220V 2A(AC-11 class)
DC110V 0.5A,
DC220V 0.25A(DC-11 class)
FR-ABR-5.5K TH-N20CXHZ-5A
FR-ABR-11K TH-N20CXHZ-11A
FR-ABR-15K TH-N20CXHZ-11A
FR-ABR-22K TH-N60-22A
400V
FR-ABR-H0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.24A
FR-ABR-H11K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A
FR-ABR-H15K TH-N20CXHZ-6.6A
FR-ABR-H22K TH-N20-9A
R
MC
Power
Supply
High-duty
brake resistor
(FR-ABR)
Thermal
relay
(OCR)(*2)Inverter
PX
PR
P/+
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
Disconnect jumper. (*1)
MC
Power
Supply
T
F
ON OFF
MC
MC
OCR
Contact
<Example 1> <Example 2>
PX
PR
P/+
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
Inverter (OCR)(*2)
Thermal
relay
(FR-ABR)
High-duty
brake resistor
R
Disconnect jumper. (*1)
B
C
T
F
ON OFF
OCR
Contact
MC
MC
To the inverter
P/+ terminal
To the ABR
TH-N20
1/L1 5/L3
2/T1 6/T3

38
Step of operation
3 DRIVE THE MOTOR
3.1 Step of operation
The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Turning the start command on
start the motor rotating and the motor speed is determined by the frequency command (set
frequency).
Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
·When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay (Refer to
page 48)
· When the rated frequency of the motor is 50Hz, set Pr.3 Base frequency (Refer to page 49)
CAUTION
Check the following items before powering on the inverter.
· Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to page 7)
· Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to page 8)
· Check that no load is connected to the motor.
Connect a switch, relay, etc.
to the control circuit
terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
Start command using the PU connector and
RS-485 terminal of the inverter and plug-in
option (Communication)
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/
FR-PU07).
(PU)
Change frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
Perform frequency
setting by a current
output device
(Connection across
terminals 4-5)
Perform frequency
setting by a voltage
output device
(Connection across
terminals 2-5)
Set from the
PU (FR-DU07/
FR-PU04/
FR-PU07).
Change of frequency
with ON/OFF switches
connected to terminals
(multi-speed setting)
Perform frequency
setting by a current
output device
(Connection across
terminals 4-5)
Perform frequency
setting by a voltage
output device
(Connection across
terminals 2-5)
(External) (External) (External)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
Start command with
on the operation panel (PU)
Step of operationf opStep of operation
Installation/mounting
System examination
Wiring of the power
supply and motor
How
to give a start
command?
How to
give a frequency
command?
How to
give a frequency
command?
{Refer to page 73} {Refer to page 75} {Refer to page 77} {Refer to page 76}
{Refer to page 10}
{Refer to page 7}
Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
{Refer to page 78} {Refer to page 79} {Refer to page 83} {Refer to page 81}

39
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.2 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
3.2.1 Parts of the operation panel (FR-DU07)
Setting dial
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter
dial)
Used to change the
frequency setting and
parameter values.
Operation mode switchover
Used to switch between the PU and external operation mode.
When using the external operation mode (operation using a separately
connected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to
light up the EXT indication. (Change the Pr.79 value to use the combined mode.)
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Monitor(4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter
number, etc.
Monitor indication
Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate external operation mode.
NET: Lit to indicate network operation mode.
Rotation direction indication
REV: Lit during reverse rotation
FWD: Lit during forward rotation
Start command
forward rotation
Start command
reverse rotation
Stop operation
Alarms can be reset
Mode
switchover
Used to change
each setting mode.
Unit indication
· Hz: Lit to indicate frequency.
· A: Lit to indicate current.
· V: Lit to indicate voltage.
(Flicker when the set frequency monitor is
displayed.)
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
energy saving monitor of Pr. 52 is set.
Used to set each setting.
If pressed during operation, monitor
changes as below;
Running
frequency
Output
current
Output
voltage
Operation mode indication
On: Forward/reverse operation
Flickering: When the frequency command is
not given even if the
forward/reverse command is given.
*
No function

40
3.2.2 Basic operation (factory setting)
CAUTION
⋅ Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
At powering on (external operation mode)
PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)
Parameter setting mode
PU Jog operation mode
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor
Display the current
setting
Value change
Value change
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter and a setting value
flicker alternately.
Parameter clear All parameter
clear
Alarm clear
Parameter copy
(Example)
(Example)
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
and frequency flicker.
[Operation for displaying alarm history]
Past eight alarms can be displayed.
(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)
When no alarm history exists, is displayed.
Operation mode switchover
ParametersettingAlarmhistoryMonitor/frequencysetting
(Refer to page 145)
(Refer to page 43)

41
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.2.3 Operation lock (Press [MODE] for an extended time (2s))
· Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
· When the setting dial and key operation is made invalid, appears on the operation panel.
When the setting dial and key operation is invalid, appears if the setting dial or key operation is
performed. (When the setting dial or key operation is not performed for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
· To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press for 2s.
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change
and unexpected start and stop.
POINT
Set "10 or 11" (key lock mode valid) in Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Functions valid even in the operation lock status
Stop and reset with .
CAUTION
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
1.Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.
DisplayOperation
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU
operation mode.
3.Press to choose the parameter
setting mode.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
7.Press to set.
5.Press to read the currently set value.
4.Turn until appears.
The parameter
number read
previously
appears.
8.Press for 2s to show the key lock mode.
Press for 2s.
(Pr. 161)
" " (initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the setting
value " ".

42
3.2.4 Monitoring of output current and output voltage
3.2.5 First priority monitor
Hold down for 1s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode.
(To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down for 1s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
3.2.6 Setting dial push
Push the setting dial ( ) to display the set frequency currently set.
POINT
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing during
monitoring mode.
2.Independently of whether the inverter is running
in any operation mode or at a stop, the output
current monitor appears by pressing .
3.Press to show the output voltage monitor.
1.Press during operation to choose the output
frequency monitor
DisplayOperation

43
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.2.7 Change the parameter setting value
Changing example Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .
are displayed ... Why?
appears. ......Write disable error
appears. ......Write error during operation
appears. ......Calibration error
appears. ......Mode designation error
For details refer to page 131.
REMARKS
The number of digits displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is four.
If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals can not be displayed nor
set.
(Example) When Pr. 1
When 60Hz is set, 60.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed and second decimal place is not displayed nor set.
DisplayOperation
setting mode.
4. Pr. 1) appears.
7.Press to set.
" "(initial value) appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set
value " ".
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
· Press to show the setting again.
· Press twice to show the next parameter.
· By turning , you can read another parameter.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
· Press twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.
to

44
3.2.8 Parameter clear, all parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear , ALLC all parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
· Refer to the parameter list on page 88 and later for parameters to be cleared with this operation.
and are displayed alternately ... Why?
The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press .
is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
DisplayOperation
setting mode.
7.Press to set.
mode.
· Turn to read another parameter.
4.Turn until " ", " "
appears.
6.Turn clockwise to change it to
the setting value of " ".
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
Parameter clear All parameter clear
All parameter clearParameter clear

45
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.2.9 Parameter copy and parameter verification
(1) Parameter copy
PCPY Setting Description
0 Cancel
1 Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
2 Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 47.)
REMARKS
· When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-A700 series or parameter copy write is performed after parameter copy read is
stopped, "model error ( )" is displayed.
· Refer to the parameter list on page 88 and later for availability of parameter copy.
· When the power is turned off or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or
check the values by parameter verification.
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters.
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
• Connect it during a stop.
DisplayOperation
setting mode.
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
6.Press to copy the source parameters
to the operation panel.
4.Press to to read the currently set value.
Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!
9.Press to write the parameters copied to
the operation panel to the destination inverter.
3.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
5.Turn to change it to the setting value
" ".
Flickers for about 30s
The frequency flickers
for about 30s
About 30s later
10.When copy is completed,
" " and " " flicker.
11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power off once, before starting operation.
7.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
turn to change it to " ".
The parameter
number previously
read appears.

46
(2) Parameter verification
appears...Why? Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.
appears...Why? Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.
and flicker alternately
Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of 55K or less and 75K or more.
1. Set "0" (initial value) in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 61, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 , Pr. 158,
Pr. 455, Pr. 458 to Pr. 462, Pr. 557, Pr. 859, Pr. 860, Pr. 893.
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.
REMARKS
When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-A700 series, "model error ( )" is displayed.
flickers ... Why?
Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.
55K or less 75K or more
Pr. 989 Setting 10 100
• Hold down to verify.
DisplayOperation
7.Press to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.
1.Replace the operation panel on the
inverter to be verified.
• Replace it during a stop.
Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
4.Turn until (parameter copy)
appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set value
" "(parameter copy verification mode).
8.It there is no difference, " " and " "
flicker to complete verification.
Flickering
• If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and flicker.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
5.Press to read the currently set
value.
setting mode.

3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
47
Before operation
Simplemodeparameterlist
3.3 Before operation
3.3.1 Simple mode parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from
the operation panel (FR-DU07). For details of parameters, refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).
POINT
Only simple mode parameter can be displayed using Pr.160 User group read selection. (All parameters are displayed
with the initial setting.) Set Pr. 160 User group read selection as required. (Refer to page 43 for parameter change.)
Pr. 160 Description
9999 Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
0
(Initial Value)
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.
1 Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.
Parameter
Number
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Applications
Refer
to
0 Torque boost 0.1%
6/4/3/2/
1%*1
0 to 30%
Set to increase a starting torque or when the
motor with a load will not rotate, resulting in an
alarm [OL] and a trip [OC1]
*1 The initial value differs according to the inverter
capacity. (0.4K, 0.75K/1.5K to 3.7K/5.5K, 7.5K/
11K to 55K/75K or more)
50
1
Maximum
frequency
0.01Hz
120/
60Hz*2
0 to 120Hz
Set when the maximum output frequency need
to be limited.
capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
51
2
Minimum
frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 120Hz
Set when the minimum output frequency need
to be limited.
51
3 Base frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set when the rated motor frequency is 50Hz.
Check the motor rating plate.
49
4
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set when changing the preset speed in the
parameter with a terminal.
795
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz
6
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 400Hz
7 Acceleration time 0.1s 5/15s*3 0 to 3600s Acceleration/deceleration time can be set.
capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or more)
52
8 Deceleration time 0.1s 5/15s*3 0 to 3600s
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
0.01/
0.1A*4
Inverter
rated
current
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A*4
Protect the motor from overheat by the inverter.
Set the rated motor current.
*4 The increments and setting range differ
according to the inverter capacity. (55K or less/
75K or more)
48
79
Operation mode
selection
1 0 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7
Select the operation command location and
frequency command location.
53
125
Terminal 2
frequency setting
gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Frequency for the maximum value of the
potentiometer (5V initial value) can be changed.
82
126
Terminal 4
frequency setting
gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Frequency for the maximum current input
(20mA initial value) can be changed.
84
160
User group read
selection
1 0 0, 1, 9999
Parameter which can be read from the
operation panel and parameter unit can be
restricted.
—

48
Before operation
3.3.2 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter (Pr. 9)
Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value Setting Range *2 Description
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
Inverter rated
current *1
55K or less 0 to 500A
75K or more 0 to 3600A
*1 Refer to page 158 for the rated inverter current value.
The initial values of the 0.4K and 0.75K are set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
*2 The minimum setting increments are 0.01A for the 55K or less and 0.1A for the 75K or more.
Changing example Change the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting to 7.5A according to the motor rated current.
(FR-A720-1.5K)
CAUTION
· Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off.
· When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
· When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
· A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use an external thermal relay.
· PTC thermistor output built-in the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal). For details, refer to section 4 of
5.Press to show the currently
set value.
setting mode.
7.Press to set.
4.Turn until Pr. 9 Electronic
thermal O/L relay appears.
6.Turn to change the set value
to
2.Press to choose the PU
operation mode.
PU indication is lit.
The parameter number
read previously appears.
DisplayOperation
" ". (7.5A)
(8A for FR-A720-1.5K)
Refer to page
158 for initial
value of the
inverter rated
current.

3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
49
Before operation
3.3.3 When the rated motor frequency is 50Hz (Pr. 3)
First, check the motor rating plate. If a frequency given on the rating plate is "50Hz" only, always set Pr. 3 Base frequency
to "50Hz". Leaving the base frequency unchanged from "60Hz" may make the voltage low and the torque insufficient. It
may result in an inverter trip (E.OC ) due to overload.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
3 Base frequency 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency when the motor
rated torque is generated.
Changing example Change Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz according to the motor rated frequency.
REMARKS
· Pr. 3 is invalid under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control, and vector control and Pr.84 Rated
motor frequency is valid.
V/FV/FV/F
setting mode.
7.Press to set.
4.Turn until Pr. 3 Base frequency
appears.
2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
DisplayOperation
The parameter
number
read previously
appears.
5.Press to show the currently set
value. (60Hz)
6.Turn to change it to
the set value " ". (50Hz)

50
Before operation
3.3.4 Increase the starting torque (Pr. 0)
Set this parameter when "the motor with a load will not rotate", "an alarm [OL] is output, resulting in an inverter
trip due to [OC1], etc.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value
Setting
Range
Description
0 Torque boost
0.4K, 0.75K 6%
0 to 30%
Motor torque in the low-
frequency range can be
adjusted to the load to increase
the starting motor torque.
1.5K to 3.7K 4%
5.5K, 7.5K 3%
11K to 55K 2%
75K or more 1%
Changing example When the motor with a load will not rotate,
increase the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% unit by looking at
the motor movement. (The guideline is for about 10%
change at the greatest.)
REMARKS
· A too large setting may cause the motor to overheat, resulting in an overcurrent shut-off (OL (overcurrent alarm) then E.OC1
(overcurrent shutoff during acceleration)), overload shut-off (E.THM (motor overload shutoff), and E.THT (inverter overload shutoff)).
(When a protective function occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 setting 1% by 1% to reset. (Refer to page 43)
POINT
If the inverter still does not operate properly after the above measures, adjust Pr. 80, Pr. 81 (Advanced magnetic flux
vector control), Pr.800 (Real sensorless vector control). The Pr.0 setting is invalid under advanced magnetic flux
vector control, real sensorless vector control and vector control. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
V/FV/FV/F
Output
voltage
Pr.0
Pr.46
Setting
range
Base
frequency
0
100%
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Pr.112
DisplayOperation
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
setting mode.
4. Pr. 0) appears.
7.Press to set.
PU indication is lit.2.Press to choose the PU operation mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.
6.Turn to change it to the set value
" ".
" "(initial value is 6% for the 0.75K)
appears.

3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
51
Before operation
3.3.5 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)
Motor speed can be limitted.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value
Setting
Range
Description
1 Maximum frequency
55K or less 120Hz
0 to 120Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
75K or more 60Hz
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
Changing example Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer,
etc. to 60Hz maximum.
(Set "60"Hz in Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.)
REMARKS
· The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even if the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will
not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
Note that Pr. 15 Jog frequency has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
· When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting can not be set by .
· When performing a high speed operation at 120Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency is necessary.
CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency
according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without entry of the command
frequency.
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2 Frequency setting
Clamped at the
maximum frequency
Clamped at the
minimum frequency
5, 10V
(20mA)
0
(4mA)
DisplayOperation
setting mode.
4. Pr. 1) appears.
7.Press to set.
value " ".
mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.

52
Before operation
3.3.6 Change acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)
* Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and setting increments is
"0.1s".
Set in Pr. 7 Acceleration time a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase.
Set in Pr. 8 Deceleration time a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value
Setting
Range
Description
7 Acceleration time
7.5K or less 5s 0 to 3600/
360s *
Set the motor acceleration time.
11K or more 15s
8 Deceleration time
7.5K or less 5s 0 to 3600/
360s *
Set the motor deceleration time.
11K or more 15
Changing example Change the Pr. 7 Acceleration time setting from "5s" to
"10s".
Running
frequency
Acceleration
time
Deceleration
time
Time
Pr.20
Pr.7 Pr.8
Output
frequency(Hz)
Pr.110 Pr.111
Pr.44 Pr.45
(60Hz)
DisplayOperation
setting mode.
4. Pr. 7) appears.
7.Press to set.
mode.
The initial value
differs according
to the capacity.
value " ".
The parameter
number read
previously appears.

3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
53
Before operation
3.3.7 Selection of the start command and frequency command locations (Pr. 79)
* For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign
functions.
For Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).
When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
Select the start command location and frequency command location.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting
Range
Description
LED Indication
: Off
: On
79
Operation
mode
selection
0
0
Use external/PU switchover mode (press to switch
between the PU and external operation mode. (Refer to
page 73))
At power on, the inverter is in the external operation
mode.
External operation mode
PU operation mode
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
2
Fixed to external operation mode
Operation can be performed by switching between the
external and NET operation mode.
NET operation mode
3
External/PU combined operation mode 1
Running frequency Start signal
PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) setting or
external signal input (multi-
speed setting, across
terminals 4-5 (valid when
AU signal turns on)).
External signal input
(terminal STF, STR)
4
External/PU combined operation mode 2
Running frequency Start signal
External signal input
(Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG,
multi-speed selection, etc.)
Input from the PU (FR-
DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
( , )
6
Switchover mode
Switch among PU operation, external operation, and
NET operation while keeping the same operation status.
PU operation mode
NET operation mode
7
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
X12 signal ON*
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation
mode.
(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF*
Operation mode can not be switched to the PU
operation mode.
PU operation mode
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD
REV FWD

54
Before operation
3.3.8 Large starting torque and low speed torque are necessary (advanced magnetic
flux vector control, real sensorless vector control) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800)
* Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the terminals used for the X18 and MC signal. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied)).
Advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the capacity, poles and type of the motor used in Pr. 80
and Pr. 81. Real sensorless vector control can be selected for applications requiring high accuracy and fast response
control. Perform offline auto tuning and online auto tuning when using real sensorless vector control.
• What is advanced magnetic flux vector control?
The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation so that the motor current which meets the
load torque to flow. Output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is made so that the motor actual speed
approximates a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates drastically, etc.
Low-speed torque is improved as compared to V/F control. In addition, speed accuracy is improved when load is
applied.
• What is real sensorless vector control?
This function enables vector control with a general-purpose motor without encoder. Low speed torque and speed
accuracy are improved as compared to advanced magnetic flux vector control. Always perform offline auto tuning
and online auto tuning when using real sensorless vector control.
Real sensorless vector control is suitable for the following applications.
· To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
· To generate low speed torque
· To prevent machine from damage due to too large torque (torque limit)
· To perform torque control
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
Setting Range Description
71 Applied motor 0
0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43,
44, 50, 53, 54
By selecting a standard motor or constant
torque motor, thermal characteristic and
motor constants of each motor are set.
80 Motor capacity 9999
55K or less 0.4 to 55kW
Set the applied motor capacity.
75K or more 0 to 3600kW
9999 V/F control
81 Number of motor poles 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Set the number of motor poles.
12, 14, 16, 18, 20
X18 signal-ON:V/F
control *
Set 10 + number of
motor poles.
9999 V/F control
800 Control method selection 20
0 to 5 Vector control (Refer to page 57)
9 Vector control test operation
10 Speed control
Real sensorless
vector control
11 Torque control
12
MC signal-ON:torque
MC signal-OFF:speed *
20 V/F control (advanced magnetic flux vector control)
POINT
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven
rotation may occurr.
· The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is 0.4kW or
more)
· Motor to be used is either Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR two-pole, four-pole, six-pole
0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA 200V class four-pole 0.4kW to 55kW). When
using a motor other than the above (SF-TH other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
(advanced magnetic flux vector control)
When performing real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning are necessary even when Mitsubishi motor is used.
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
· The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where actual
wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m.)
CAUTION
· Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. (It is not suitable for machines such as grinding machine and
wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.)
· Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
· When advanced magnetic flux vector control is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) connected,
output torque may decrease. In addition, do not use a sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC).
· Do not perform real sensorless vector control with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) or sine wave filer (MT-BSL/
BSC) connected.
Magnetic fluxMagnetic fluxMagnetic flux SensorlessSensorlessSensorless

55
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
<Selection method of advanced magnetic flux vector control>
REMARKS
· When higher accuracy operation is necessary, set online auto tuning after performing offline auto tuning and select real
sensorless vector control.
· Use Pr. 89 to adjust the motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Test run
Perform secure wiring. (Refer to page 8.)
Set the motor. (Pr. 71) (Refer to page 54.)
Set the run command. (Refer to page 73.)
As required
· Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr.96) (refer to page 62).
· Select online auto tuning. (Pr.95) (refer to page 66).
Select the start command and speed command.
(1) Start command
1) Operation panel: Setting by pressing / of the
operation panel
2) External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse
rotation command (terminal STF or STR)
(2)Speed command
1) Operation panel: Setting by pressing of the operation panel
2) External analog command (terminal 2 or 4) :
Give a speed command using the analog signal input to
terminal 2 (or terminal 4).
3) Multi-speed command:
The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give
speed command.
Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles according as required.
(Pr. 80, Pr. 81) (Refer to page 54.)
Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 Motor capacity and set the number
of motor poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 Number of motor poles. (V/F
control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
*1 For other settings of Pr. 71 , refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).
*2 Refer to page 62 for offline auto tuning.
Motor Pr. 71 Setting *1 Remarks
Mitsubishi standard
motor
Mitsubishi high
efficiency motor
SF-JR 0 (initial value)
SF-JR 4P-1.5kW or less 20
SF-HR 40
Others 3
Offline auto tuning is
necessary.*2
torque motor
SF-JRCA 200V 4P 1
SF-HRCA 200V 4P 50
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
necessary. *2
Other
manufacturer's
standard motor
− 3
necessary. *2
Other
manufacturer's
constant torque
motor
− 13
necessary. *2

56
Before operation
<Selection method of real sensorless vector control (speed control) >
Speed control is exercised to match the speed command and actual motor speed.
CAUTION
⋅ Make sure to perform offline auto tuning before performing real sensorless vector control.
⋅ Speed command setting range is 0 to 120Hz for real sensorless vector control.
⋅ The carrier frequencies are selectable from among 2k, 6k, 10k, 14kHz for real sensorless vector control.
⋅ Torque control can not be performed in the low speed (approx. 10Hz or less) regeneration range and with light load at low speed
(approx. 20% or less of rated torque at approx. 5Hz or less). Choose vector control.
⋅ Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed even when
the start command (STF or STR) is not input. The motor may run also at a low speed when the speed limit value = 0 with a start
command input. Perform pre-excitation after making sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs.
⋅ Do not switch between the STF (forward rotation command) and STR (reverse rotation command) during operation under torque
control. Overcurrent shut-off error (E.OC ) or opposite rotation deceleration error (E.11) occurs.
⋅ For the 0.4K to 3.7K, the speed deviation may become large at 20Hz or less and torque may become insufficient in the low speed
range under 1Hz during continuous operation under real sensorless vector control. In this case, stop the inverter once, then start
(online auto tuning) again to improve.
⋅ When the inverter is likely to start during motor coasting under real sensorless vector control, set to make frequency search of
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure valid (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999", Pr. 162 = "10").
⋅ Enough torque may not be generated in the ultra-low speed range less than approx. 2Hz when performing real sensorless vector
control.
The guideline of speed control range is as shown below.
Driving: 1:200 (2, 4, 6 poles) Can be used at 0.3Hz or more at rated 60Hz
1:30 (8, 10 poles) Can be used at 2Hz or more at rated 60Hz
Regeneration:1:12 (2 to 10 poles) Can be used at 5Hz or more at rated 60Hz
Test run
Set the motor. (Pr. 71) (Refer to page 55.)
Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to page 62.)
Select a control method. (Refer to page 54)
As required
⋅ Easy gain tuning (Refer to page 67)
⋅ Select online auto tuning. (Pr. 95) (Refer to page 66)
⋅ Manual input speed control gain adjustment (Refer to page 69)
Set "10" (speed control) or "12" (speed-torque switchover) in Pr. 800 and make
speed control valid.
(3) Start command
1) Operation panel: Setting by pressing / of the operation panel
2) External command: Setting by forward rotation and reverse rotation
command (terminal STF or STR)
(4) Speed command
1) Operation panel: Setting by turning of the operation panel
2) External analog command (terminal 2 or 4) :
Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 (or
terminal 4).
3) Multi-speed command:
The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give speed
command.
Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles. (Pr. 80, Pr. 81)
(Refer to page 91.)
Set the operation command. (Refer to page 73 )
Set the torque limit. (Pr. 810) (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 Motor capacity and set the number of
motor poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 Number of motor poles.
(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).)
Set "3" (standard motor) or "13" (constant torque motor) in Pr. 71
Applied motor.

57
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.3.9 Higher accuracy operation using a motor with encoder (Vector control)
(Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.359, Pr.369, Pr.800)
* Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the terminals used for the X18 and MC signal. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied)).
Full-scale vector control can be performed fitting the FR-A7AP and using a motor with encoder. Fast response/
high accuracy speed control (zero speed control, servo lock), torque control, and position control can be
performed.
• What is vector control?
Excellent control characteristics when compared to V/F control and other control techniques, achieving the
control characteristics equal to those of DC machines.
It is suitable for applications below.
· To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
· To generate low speed torque
· To prevent machine from damage due to too large torque (torque limit)
· To perform torque control or position control
· Servo-lock torque control which generates a torque at zero speed (i.e. status of motor shaft = stopped)
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
71 Applied motor 0
0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43,
44, 50, 53, 54
By selecting a standard motor or constant
torque motor, thermal characteristic and motor
constants of each motor are set.
80 Motor capacity 9999
55K or less 0.4 to 55kW
75K or more 0 to 3600kW
9999 V/F control
81 Number of motor poles 9999
12, 14, 16, 18, 20
X18 signal-ON:V/F
control *
Set 10 + number of
motor poles.
9999 V/F control
359
Encoder rotation
direction
1
0
1
369
Number of encoder
pulses
1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of pulses of the encoder.
Set the number of pulses before multiplied by
four.
800 Control method selection 20
0 Speed control
Vector control
1 Torque control
2
MC signal-ON:torque
3 Position control
4
MC signal-ON:position
5
MC signal-ON:torque
MC signal-OFF:position *
9
Vector control test operation
(applied))
10 to 12
Real sensorless vector control
(Refer to page 55)
20
V/F control (advanced magnetic flux vector
control)
VectorVectorVector
A
Encoder
CW
Clockwise direction as viewed
from A is forward rotation
CCW
A
Encoder
Counter clockwise direction as
viewed from A is forward rotation

58
Before operation
POINT
If the conditions below are not satisfied, malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven rotation may occur.
· The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is
0.4kW or more)
· Motor to be used is either Mitsubishi standard motor with encoder, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR two-pole,
four-pole, six-pole 0.4kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA 200V class four-pole
0.4kW to 55kW) or vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU). When using a motor other than the above (other
manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
· Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
· Wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring
work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m.)
CAUTION
· Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
· Do not perform vector control with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) or sine wave filer (MT-BSL/BSC) connected.

3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
59
Before operation
<Selection method of speed control>
Speed control is exercised to match the speed command and actual motor speed.
CAUTION
⋅ Speed command setting range is 0 to 120Hz for vector control.
⋅ The carrier frequencies are selectable from among 2k, 6k, 10k, 14kHz for vector control.
(2k and 6kHz for the 75K or more)
Test run
Set the motor and encoder. (Pr. 71, Pr. 359, Pr. 369)
Set the run command. (Refer to page 74.)
As required
· Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (refer to page 62).
· Select online auto tuning. (Pr. 95) (refer to page 66).
· Easy gain tuning (refer to page 67)
· Manual input speed control gain adjustment (refer to page 69)
(1) Start command
1)Operation panel: Setting by pressing / of the
operation panel
2)External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse
rotation command (terminal STF or STR)
(2)Speed command
1)Operation panel: Setting by pressing of the operation panel
2)External analog command (terminal 2 or 4) :
Give a speed command using the analog signal input to
terminal 2 (or terminal 4).
3)Multi-speed command:
The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give
speed command.
Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles
control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).)
Mount the FR-A7AP.
Set Pr. 71 Applied motor, Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction and Pr. 369
Number of encoder pulses according to the motor and encoder used.
(Refer to page 33.)
Select a control method. (Refer to page 57.)
Make speed control valid by selecting "0" (speed control), "2" (speed-
torque switchover), or "4" (speed-position switchover) for Pr. 800.
Set the torque limit. (Pr. 810)

60
Before operation
<Selection method of torque control>
Torque control is exercised to develop torque as set in the torque command.
The motor speed becomes constant when the motor output torque and load torque are balanced.
For torque control, therefore, the speed is determined by the load.
For torque control, the motor gains speed as the motor output torque becomes greater than the motor load.
To prevent overspeed, set the speed limit value so that the motor speed does not increase too high.
(Speed control is exercised during speed limit and torque control is disabled.)
When speed limit is not set, the speed limit value setting is regarded as 0Hz to disable torque control.
CAUTION
Test run
As required
· Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (refer to page 62).
· Select online auto tuning. (Pr. 95) (refer to page 66).
· Manual input torque control gain adjustment (refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles. (Pr. 80, Pr. 81)
(Refer to page 57.)
of motor poles in Pr. 81 Number of motor poles.
(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).)
Mount the FR-A7AP.
(Refer to page 33.)
Set either "1" (torque control), "2" (speed-torque switchover) or "5"
(position-torque switchover) in Pr. 800 and make torque control valid.
Set the torque command. (Pr. 804)
Set the speed limit. (Pr. 807)

61
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
<Selection method of position control>
In the position control, the speed command is calculated so that the difference between command pulse (or
parameter setting) and the number of feedback pulses from the encoder is zero to run the motor.
This inverter can perform conditional position feed by contact input and position control by inverter conditional
pulse input.
CAUTION
Test run
As required
· Set the electronic gear. (refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
· Setting of positioning adjustment parameter (refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
· Gain adjustment of position control (refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles.
control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).)
Mount the FR-A7AP.
(Refer to page 33.)
Make speed control valid by selecting "3" (position control) "4" (speed-
position switchover) or "5" (position-torque switchover) for Pr. 800.
Selection of position command source. (Pr. 419)
Setting of parameter for position feed
(Pr. 465 to Pr. 494).
(applied).)
Selection of command pulse form.
(Pr. 428)
(applied).)
Position command by contact input
Set "0" (initial value) in Pr. 419.
Position command by inverter pulse train input
Set "2" in Pr. 419.

62
Before operation
3.3.10 To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96)
The motor performance can be maximized with offline auto tuning.
• What is offline auto tuning?
When performing advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control or vector control, the
motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by automaticaly measuring the motor constants
(offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring
length is long.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
71 Applied motor 0
0 to 8, 13 to 18, 20,
23, 24, 30, 33, 34, 40, 43,
44, 50, 53, 54
By selecting a standard motor or
constant torque motor, thermal
characteristic and motor constants of
each motor are set.
83 Motor rated voltage 200/400V * 0 to 1000V
Set the rated motor voltage(V).
* The initial value differs according to
the voltage level. (200V/400V)
84 Rated motor frequency 60Hz 10 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
96
Auto tuning setting/
status
0
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed
1
Offline auto tuning is performed without
motor running
101
Offline auto tuning is performed with
motor running
POINT
· This function is made valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 and advanced magnetic
flux vector control, real sensorless vector control or vector control is selected.
· You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07).
· Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC, SF-TH, etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor, high
efficiency motor (SF-JR SF-HR 0.4kW or more), Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA SF-HRCA four-pole
0.4kW to 55kW) and vector control dedicated motor (SF-V5RU) are used or the wiring length is long, using the
offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics.
· Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. (As the load is lighter, tuning accuracy is higher.
Tuning accuracy does not change even if the inertia is large.)
· For the offline auto tuning, you can select either the motor non-rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "1") or rotation mode (Pr. 96
= "101").
· The rotation mode has higher tuning accuracy than the non-rotation mode.
· Reading/writing/copy of motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled.
· The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07/FR-PU04).
· Do not connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the 55K or less and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to
the 75K or more between the inverter and motor.
Magnetic fluxMagnetic fluxMagnetic flux SensorlessSensorlessSensorless VectorVectorVector

63
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
(1) Before performing offline auto tuning
Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.
· Make sure advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80, Pr. 81), real sensorless vector control or vector control (Pr.
800) is selected. (Refer to page 54 )
· A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
· The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is 0.4kW
or more)
· The maximum frequency is 120Hz.
· Motors such as high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned.
· Even if tuning is performed without motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1"), the motor may run slightly.
Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no
problem in safety if the motor runs. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications). Note that if the motor
runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
· Note the following when selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status =
"101").
Torque is not enough during tuning.
The motor may be run at nearly its rated speed.
The brake is open.
No external force is applied to rotate the motor.
· Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-
H) connected to the 55K or less and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) connected to the 75K or more between the
inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
· When exercising vector control, use the encoder that is coupled directly to the motor shaft without looseness.
Speed ratio should be 1:1.
(2) Setting
1) Set "1" or "101" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status .
· When the setting is "1" . . . . . . . . Tuning is performed without motor running.
It takes approximately 25 to 120s * until tuning is completed.
(Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
*Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and motor type.
· When the setting is "101" . . . . . . Tuning is performed with motor running.
It takes approximately 40s until tuning is completed.
The motor runs at nearly its rated frequency.
2) Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200V/400V) in Pr. 83 Motor rated voltage and rated frequency of motor
(initial value is 60Hz) in Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency .
(For a Japanese standard motor, etc. which has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated values, set 200V/60Hz or 400V/60Hz).)
3) Set Pr. 71 Applied motor according to the motor used.
* For other settings of Pr. 71 , refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).
REMARKS
When using the vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU and SF-THY, setting 33 and 34 in Pr. 71 selects internal constants
appropriate for dedicated motors. Therefore, Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 settings are unnecessary.
Motor Pr. 71 Setting *
Mitsubishi standard
motor
Mitsubishi high efficiency
motor
SF-JR, SF-TH 3
SF-JR 4P-1.5kW or less 23
SF-HR 43
Others 3
torque motor
SF-JRCA 4P,
SF-TH (constant torque)
13
SF-HRCA 4P 53
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
Vector control dediated
motor
SF-V5RU
SF-THY
33
standard motor
− 3
constant torque motor
− 13

64
Before operation
(3) Execution of tuning
1)When performing PU operation, press / of the operation panel.
For external operation, turn on the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
2)Monitor is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04) during tuning as
below.
· Reference: Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)
CAUTION
· Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. (Refer to 2) below) When the start command is turned on under V/F
control, the motor starts.
CAUTION
· When selecting offline auto tuning performed with motor running (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "101"), caution must be
taken since the motor runs.
· To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press of the operation panel.
(Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)
· During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value)
· Input signals <valid signal> STOP, OH, MRS, RT, CS, RES, STF, STR
· Output terminal RUN, OL, IPF, FM, AM, A1B1C1
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output from AM and FM when speed and output frequency are selected.
· Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequerence which releases a
mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
· When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the
inverter.
· Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto tuning. Auto
tuning is not excecuted properly.
· Setting offline auto tuning (Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status = "1 or 101") will make pre-excitation invalid.
Parameter Unit
(FR-PU07/FR-PU04) Display
Operation Panel (FR-DU07) Display
Pr. 96 setting 1 101 1 101
(1) Setting
(2) Tuning in
progress
(3) Normal end
(4) Error end (when
the inverter
protective function
is activated)
Offline Auto Tuning Setting Time
Non-rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "1")
Approximately 25 to 120s
(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and motor type.)
Rotation mode (Pr. 96 = "101")
Approximately 40s
(Offline auto tuning time varies with the acceleration and deceleration time
settings as indicated below. Offline auto tuning time = acceleration time +
deceleration time + approx. 30s)
1
STOP PU
101
STOP PU
FWD PU
2
STF
TUNE
FWD PU
102
STF
TUNE
STOP PU
3
STF
TUNE
COMPLETION
STOP PU
103
STF
TUNE
COMPLETION
Flickering Flickering
STOP PU
9
STF
TUNE
ERROR

65
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3)When offline auto tuning ends, press of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn
off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
4)If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
5)When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline
auto tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
REMARKS
· Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (3 or 103).
If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid.
If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
Error Display Error Cause Remedy
8 Forced end
Set "1" or "101" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning
again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make setting again.
91
Current limit (stall prevention) function was
activated.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
Set "1" in Pr. 156 .
92
Converter output voltage reached 75% of
rated value.
Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.
93
Calculation error
A motor is not connected.
Check the motor wiring and make setting
again.
CAUTION
· The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the
offline auto tuning is performed again.
· An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor
runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
· Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
· The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
CAUTION
Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
When the offline auto tuning is used in vertical lift application, e.g. a lifter, it may drop due to insufficient torque.

66
Before operation
3.3.11 High accuracy operation unaffected by the motor temperature
(online auto tuning) (Pr. 95)
(1) Start-time online auto tuning (setting is "1")
· By quickly tuning the motor constants at a start, high accuracy operation unaffacted by the motor temperature and
stable operation with high torque down to ultra low speed can be performed.
· Make sure advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80, Pr. 81 ), real sensorless vector control or vector control (Pr.
800 ) is selected. (Refer to page 54.)
· Before performing online auto tuning, perform offline auto tuning without fail.
<Operation method>
1) Check that "3" or "103" (offline auto tuning completion) is set in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status.
2) Set "1" (start-time online auto tuning) in Pr. 95 Online auto tuning selection.
Online auto tuning is performed from the next starting.
3) When performing PU operation, press / of the operation panel.
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal).
(2) Magnetic flux observer (normal tuning) (setting value is "2")
· When exercising vector control using a motor with encoder, it is effective for torque accuracy improvement.
The current flowing in the motor and the inverter output voltage are used to estimate/observe the magnetic flux in
the motor.
The magnetic flux of the motor is always detected with high accuracy so that an excellent characteristic is provided
regardless of the change in the temperature of the secondary resistance.
· Vector control (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800) should be selected. (Refer to page 91.)
When online auto tuning is selected under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control
or vector control, excellent torque accuracy is provided by temperature compensation even if the secondary
resistance value of the motor varies with the rise of the motor temperature.
Parameter
Number
Name
Initial
Value
95
Online auto tuning
selection
0
0 Online auto tuning is not performed
1 Start-time online auto tuning
2 Magnetic flux observer (normal tuning)
CAUTION
· For using start-time online auto tuning in elevator, examine the utilization of a brake sequence for the brake opening timing at a
start. Though the tuning ends in about a maximum of 500ms after a start, torque is not provided fully during that period.
Therefore, note that there may be a possibility of drop due to gravity. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
It is recommended to perform tuning using a start time tuning signal (X28). (Refer to section 4 of instruction Manual (applied).)
CAUTION
· For the SF-V5RU, SF-JR (with encoder), SF-HR (with encoder), SF-JRCA (with encoder) or SF-HRCA (with encoder), it is not
necessary to perform offline auto tuning to select adaptive magnetic flux observer. (Note that it is necessary to perform offline
auto tuning (non-rotation mode) for the wiring length resistance to be reflected on the control when the wiring length is long
(30m or longer as reference).
REMARKS
· Online auto tuning does not operate if the MRS signal is input, if the preset speed is less than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency (V/F
control or advanced magnetic flux vector control), or if the starting conditions of the inverter are not satisfied, e.g. inverter error.
· Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration or at a restart during DC brake operation.
· Invalid for jog operation.
· Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure overrides when automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected.
(Start-time online auto tuning is not performed at frequency search.)
Perform online auto tuning at a stop with the X28 signal when using automatic restart after instantaneous power failure together.
(Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied) for details.)
· Zero current detection and output current detection are valid during online auto tuning.
· The RUN signal is not output during online auto tuning. The RUN signal turns on at a start.
· If the period from an inverter stop to a restart is within 4s, start-time tuning is performed but the tuning results are not reflected.
Magnetic fluxMagnetic fluxMagnetic flux SensorlessSensorlessSensorless VectorVectorVector

67
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.3.12 To perform high accuracy/fast response operation (gain adjustment of real
sensorless vector control and vector control) (Pr. 818 to Pr. 821, Pr. 880)
(1) Easy gain tuning execution procedure (Pr. 819 = "1" load inertia ratio automatic estimation)
Easy gain tuning (load inertia ratio automatic
estimation) is valid only in the speed control or
position control mode under vector control.
It is invalid under torque control, V/F control,
advanced magnetic flux vector control and real
sensorless vector control.
1) Set the response level using Pr. 818 Easy gain
tuning response level setting.
Refer to the diagram on the right and set the
response level.
Increasing the value will improve trackability
to the command, but too high value will
generate vibration. The relationship between
the setting and response level are shown on
the right.
The ratio of the load inertia to the motor inertia (load inertia moment) is estimated in real time from the torque
command and speed during motor operation by vector control. As optimum gain of speed control and position
control are automatically set from the load inertia ratio and response level, time and effort of making gain
adjustment are reduced. (Easy gain tuning)
When the load inertia ratio can not be estimated due to load fluctuation or real sensorless vector control is
exercised, control gain is automatically set by manually inputting the load inertia ratio.
Make a manual input adjustment when vibration, noise or any other unfavorable phenomenon occurs due to
large load inertia or gear backlash, for example, or when you want to exhibit the best performance that matches
the machine.
Parameter
Number
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
818
Easy gain tuning
response level setting
2 1 to 15
Set the response level.
1: Slow response to 15: Fast response
819
Easy gain tuning
selection
0
0 Without easy gain tuning
1
With load estimation, with gain calculation
(valid only during vector control)
2 With load (Pr. 880) manual input, gain calculation
820 Speed control P gain 1 60% 0 to 1000%
Set the proportional gain for speed control.
(Increasing the value improves trackability in
response to a speed command change and
reduces speed variation with disturbance.)
821
Speed control integral
time 1
0.333s 0 to 20s
Set the integral time during speed control.
(Decrease the value to shorten the time taken for
returning to the original speed if speed variation
with disturbance occurs.)
880 Load inertia ratio 7 times 0 to 200 times Set the load intertia ratio to the motor.
SensorlessSensorlessSensorless VectorVectorVector
Pr. 818 setting
Guideline of
mechanical resonance
frequency (Hz)
Response level
8 10 12 15 18 22 28 34 42 52 64 79 98 122 150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Slow
response
Fast
response
Middle
response
Large conveyor
Arm robot Precision
machine tool
General machine tool,
conveyor

68
Before operation
2) Each control gain is automatically set from the load inertia ratio estimated during acceleration/deceleration
operation and the Pr. 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting value.
Pr. 880 Load inertia ratio is used as the initial value of the load inertia ratio for tuning. Estimated value is set in Pr.
880 during tuning.
The load inertia ratio may not be estimated well, e.g. it takes a long time for estimation, if the following
conditions are not satisfied.
· Time taken for acceleration/deceleration to reach 1500r/min is 5s or less.
· Speed is 150r/min or more.
· Acceleration/deceleration torque is 10% or more of the rated torque.
· Abrupt disturbance is not applied during acceleration/deceleration.
· Load inertia ratio is approx. 30 times or less.
· No gear backlash nor belt looseness is found.
3) Press or to estimate the load inertia ratio or calculate gain any time. (The operation command for
external operation is the STF or STR signal.)
(2) Easy gain tuning execution procedure (Pr.819 = "2" load inertia manual input)
Easy gain tuning (load inertia ratio manual input) is valid only in the speed control mode under real sensorless vector
control or in the speed control or position control mode under vector control.
1) Set the load inertia ratio to the motor in Pr. 880 Load inertia ratio.
2) Set "2" (with easy gain tuning) in Pr. 819 Easy gain tuning selection. Then, Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr. 821
Speed control integral time 1 are automaticaly set by gain calculation.
Operation is performed in a gain adjusted status from the next operation.
3) Perform a test run and set the response level in Pr. 818 Easy gain tuning response level setting. Increasing the value will
improve trackability to the command, but too high value will generate vibration. (When "2" (parameter write enabled
during operation) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection , response level adjustment can be made during operation.)
(3) Parameters automatically set by easy gain tuning
The following table indicates the relationship between easy gain tuning function and gain adjustment parameter.
REMARKS
· When "1 or 2" is set in Pr. 819 and then returned the Pr. 819 setting to "0" after tuning is executed, tuning results which are set in
each parameter remain unchanged.
· When good tuning accuracy is not obtained after executing easy gain tuning due to disturbance and such, perform fine
adjustment by manual input. Set "0" (without easy gain tuning) in Pr. 819.
Easy Gain Tuning Selection (Pr. 819 ) Setting
0 1 2
Load inertia ratio
(Pr. 880)
Manual input
a) Inertia estimation result (RAM) by
easy gain tuning is dispayed.
b) Set the value in the following cases:
• Every hour after power-on
• When a value other than "1" is
set in Pr. 819
• When vector control is changed
to other control (V/F control etc.)
using Pr. 800
c) Write is enabled only during a stop
(manual input)
Manual input
Speed control P gain 1
(Pr. 820)
Speed control integral time 1
(Pr. 821)
Model speed control gain
(Pr. 828)
Position loop gain
(Pr. 422)
Manual input
a) Tuning result (RAM) is displayed. a) Gain is calculated when "2" is
set in Pr. 819 and the result is
set in the parameter.
b) Set the value in the following cases:
• Every hour after power-on
• When a value other than "1" is
set in Pr. 819
• When vector control is changed
to other control (V/F control etc.)
using Pr. 800
b) When the value is read, the
tuning result (parameter
setting value) is displayed.
c) Write (manual input) disabled c) Write (manual input) disabled
CAUTION
· Performing easy gain tuning with larger inertia than the specified value during vector control may cause malfunction such as
hunting. In addition, when the motor shaft is fixed with servo lock or position control, bearing may be damaged. To prevent these,
make gain adjustment by manual input without performing easy gain tuning.

69
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
(4) Manual input speed control gain adjustment
· Make adjustment when any of such phenomena as unusual machine vibration/noise, low response level and
overshoot has occurred.
· When there is load inertia, the actual speed gain is as given below.
· Adjustment procedures are as below:
1)Check the conditions and simultaneously change the Pr. 820 value.
2)If you cannot make proper adjustment, change the Pr. 821 value and repeat step 1).
· Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1 = "60%" (initial value) is equivalent to
120rad/s (speed responce of the motor alone). Increasing the
setting value improves the response level, but a too large gain will
produce vibration and/or unusual noise.
· Decreasing the Pr. 821 Speed control integral time 1 shortens the
return time taken at a speed change. However, a too short time will
generate an overshoot.
Actual speed gain = speed gain of motor without load ×
JM JM: Inertia of the motor
JL: Motor shaft-equivalent load inertiaJM+JL
No.
Phenomenon/
Condition
Adjustment Method
1
Load inertia
is large
Set the Pr. 820 and Pr. 821 values a little higher.
Pr. 820
When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 10% by 10% until just before
vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
Pr. 821
If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and
set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
2
Vibration/noise
generated from
mechanical system
Set the Pr. 820 value a little lower and the Pr. 821 value a little higher.
Pr. 820
Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before vibration/noise is not produced,
and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
Pr. 821
If an overshoot occurs, double the value until an overshoot does not occur, and
set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
3 Slow response
Set the Pr. 820 value a little higher.
Pr. 820
When a speed rise is slow, increase the value 5% by 5% until just before
vibration/noise is produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
4
Long return time
(response time)
Set the Pr. 821 value a little lower.
Decrease the Pr. 821 value by half until just before an overshoot or the unstable phenomenon
does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
5
Overshoot
or unstable
phenomenon occurs.
Set the Pr. 821 value a little higher.
Increase the Pr. 821 value double by double until just before an overshoot or the unstable
phenomenon does not occur, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
REMARKS
· When making manual input gain adjustment, set "0" (without easy gain tuning) (initial value) in Pr. 819 Easy gain tuning
selection.
Pr.820
Setting100%60%
(initial value)
Proportional gain
200rad/s
120rad/s
Since increasing the proportional gain enhances the
response level and decreases the speed fluctuation.
Load
fluctuation
Speed
Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken.

70
Before operation
(5) When using a multi-pole motor (8 poles or more)
Specially when using a multi-pole motor with more than 8 poles under real sensorless vector control or vector control,
adjust Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr. 824 Torque control P gain 1 according to the motor referring to the following
methods.
· For Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1, increasing the setting value improves the response level, but a too large gain will
produce vibration and/or unusual noise.
· For Pr. 824 Torque control P gain 1, note that a too low value will produce current ripples, causing the motor to generate
sound synchronizing the cycle of current ripples.
Adjustment method
No. Phenomenon/Condition Adjustment Method
1
The motor rotation is unstable in the low
speed range.
Set a higher value in Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1 according to the motor
inertia.
Since the self inertia of a multi-pole motor tends to become large, make
adjustment to improve the unstable phenomenon, then make fine adjustment
in consideration of the response level using that setting as reference.
In addition, when performing vector control with encoder, gain adjustment
according to the inertia can be easily done using easy gain tuning (Pr. 819 = 1).
2 Speed trackability is poor Set a higher value in Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1.
Increase the value 10% by 10% until just before vibration or unusual noise is
produced, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.
If you cannot make proper adjustment, increase the value of Pr. 821 Speed
control integral time 1 double by double and make adjustment of Pr. 820 again.
3
Speed variation at the load fluctuation is
large
4
Torque becomes insufficient or torque
ripple occurs at starting or in the low
speed range under real sensorless vector
control.
Set the speed control gain a little higher. (same as No. 1)
If the problem still persists after gain adjustment, increase Pr. 13 Starting
frequency or set the acceleration time shorter if the inverter is starting to avoid
continuous operation in the ultra low speed range.
5
Unusual motor and machine vibration,
noise or overcurrent occurs. Set a lower value in Pr. 824 Torque control P gain 1.
Decrease the value 10% by 10% until just before the phenomenon is
improved, and set about 0.8 to 0.9 of that value.6
Overcurrent or overspeed (E.OS) occurs
at a start under real sensorless vector
control.

71
Before operation
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
(6) Troubleshooting (speed)
Phenomenon Cause Countermeasures
1
Motor does not rotate.
(Vector control)
(1) The motor wiring is wrong (1) Wiring check
Select V/F control (set "9999" in Pr. 80 or Pr. 81 ) and
check the rotation direction of the motor.
For the SF-V5RU, set "170V(340V)" for 3.7kW or less
and "160V(320V)" for more in Pr. 19 Base frequency
voltage, and set "50Hz" in Pr. 3 Base frequency.
When the forward rotation signal is input,
the motor running in the counterclockwise
direction as viewed from the motor shaft is
normal. (If it runs in the clockwise direction,
the phase sequence of the inverter
secondary side wiring is incorrect.)
(2) Encoder specifications (encoder
specification selection switch
FR-A7AP) are wrong
(2) Check the encoder specifications.
Check the encoder specifications selection switch
(FR-A7AP) of differential/complimentary
(3) The encoder wiring is wrong. (3) Check that FWD is displayed when running the motor
in the counter-clockwise direction from outside during
a stop of the inverter with vector control setting.
If REV is displayed, the encoder phase sequence is
wrong.
Perform the correct wiring or match the Pr. 359 Encoder
rotation direction.
(4) The Pr. 369 Number of encoder
pulses setting and the number of
encoder used are different.
(4) The motor will not run if the parameter setting is
smaller than the number of encoder pulses used. Set
the Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses correctly.
(5) Encoder power specifications
are wrong. Or, power is not input.
(5) Check the power specifications (5V/12V/15V/24V) of
encoder and input the external power supply.
2
Motor does not run at
correct speed. (Speed
command does not match
actual speed)
(1) The speed command from the
command device is incorrect.
The speed command is
compounded with noise.
(1) Check that a correct speed command comes from the
command device.
Decrease Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
(2) The speed command value
does not match the inverter-
recognized value.
(2) Readjust speed command bias/gain Pr. 125, Pr. 126, C2
to C7 and C12 to C15.
(3) The number of encoder pulses
setting is incorrect.
(3) Check the setting of Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
(vector control)
3
Speed does not rise to the
speed command.
(1) Insufficient torque.
Torque limit is actuated.
(1) -1 Increase the torque limit value.
(Refer to torque limit of speed control on section 4 of
Instruction Manual (applied) )
(1) -2 Insufficient capacity
(2) Only P (proportional) control is
selected.
(2) When the load is heavy, speed deviation will occur
under P (proportional) control. Select PI control.
Pr. 359
Setting
Relationship between the Motor
and Encoder
0
1
(Initial value)
A
Encoder
CW
CCW
A
Encoder
Counter clockwise direction as
viewed from A is forward rotation

72
Before operation
4 Motor speed is unstable.
(1) The speed command varies. (1) -1 Check that a correct speed command comes from
the command device. (Take measures against
noises.)
(1) -2 Decrease Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
(1) -3 Increase Pr. 822 Speed setting filter 1. (Refer to section
4 of Instruction Manual (applied) )
(2) Insufficient torque. (2) Increase the torque limit value.
(3) The speed control gains do not
match the machine. (mechanical
resonance)
(3) -1 Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 67 )
(3) -2 Adjust Pr. 820, Pr. 821. (Refer to page 69)
(3) -3 Perform speed feed forward/model adaptive speed
control.
5
Motor or machine hunts
(vibration/noise is
produced).
(1) The speed control gain is high. (1) -1 Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 67)
(1) -2 Decrease Pr. 820 and increase Pr. 821.
(1) -3 Perform speed feed foward control and model
adaptive speed control.
(2) The torque control gain is high. (2) Decrease the Pr. 824 value. (Refer to section 4 of
(3) The motor wiring is wrong. (3) Check the wiring
6
Acceleration/deceleration
time does not match the
setting.
(1) Insufficient torque. (1) -1 Increase the torque limit value.
(1) -2 Perform speed feed foward control.
(2) Large load inertia. (2) Set the acceleration/deceleration time that meets the
load.
7
Machine operation is
unstable
(1) The speed control gains do not
match the machine.
(1) -1 Perform easy gain tuning. (Refer to page 67)
(1) -2 Adjust Pr. 820, Pr. 821. (Refer to page 69)
(1) -3 Perform speed feed foward control and model
adaptive speed control.
(2) Slow response because of
improper acceleration/
deceleration time of the inverter.
(2) Change the acceleration/deceleration time to an
optimum value.
8
Speed fluctuates at low
speed.
(1) Adverse effect of high carrier
frequency.
(1) Decrease Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
(2) Low speed control gain. (2) Increase Pr. 820 Speed control P gain 1.
Phenomenon Cause Countermeasures

73
Start/stop from the operation panel (PU
operation mode)
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.4 Start/stop from the operation panel (PU operation mode)
3.4.1 Set the set frequency to operate (example: performing operation at 30Hz)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
· Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode
of the operation panel →Refer to 3.4.1 (Refer to page 73)
· Operation using the setting dial as the volume
→Refer to 3.4.2 (Refer to page 74)
· Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to
terminals →Refer to 3.4.3 (Refer to page 75)
· Frequency setting with a voltage output device
· Frequency setting with a current output device
Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency ... Why?
Did you carry out step 4 within 5s after step 3? (Did you press within 5s after turning ?)
The frequency does not change by turning ... Why?
Check to see if the operation mode selected is the external operation mode. (Press to change to
the PU operation mode.)
Operation does not change to the PU operation mode ... Why?
Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection.
Check that the start command is not on.
Change acceleration time Pr. 7 (Refer to page 52)
Change deceleration time Pr. 8 (Refer to page 52)
For example, limit the motor speed to 60Hz maximum. Set "60Hz" in Pr. 1. (Refer to page 51)
REMARKS
· Press to show the set frequency.
· can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to page 74)
Three-phase
AC power supply Motor
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
FR-DU07
,
,
[Connection diagram]
2.Press to choose the PU
operation mode.
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
6.To change the set frequency, perform the
operation in above steps 3 and 4.
(Starts from the previously set frequency.)
7.Press to stop.
Flickers for
about 5s
5.After the value flickered for about 3s,
the display returns to 0.00 (monitor display).
Press (or ) to start operation. ( )
4.While the value is flickering,
press to set the frequency.
If you do not press , the value flickers for about 5s
and the display then returns to 0.00 (display) Hz.
At this time, return to "Step 3" and set the frequency again.
3.Turn to show the frequency
you want to set.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.
DisplayOperation
3s later

74
operation mode)
3.4.2 Use the setting dial like a potentiometer to perform operation.
POINT
Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Operation example Change the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation
REMARKS
· If flickering "60.00" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection setting may not be "1".
· Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning .
DisplayOperation
2.Press to choose the PU operation
mode.
3.Change Pr. 161 to the setting value " ".
4.Press (or ) to start the inverter.
5.Turn until " " appears.
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press .
60.00
(Refer to page 43 for change of the setting.)

75
operation mode)
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.4.3 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed
setting)
POINT
· Use / to give a start command.
· Pr. 79 Operation mode selection must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2)
· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Refer to page 79 to change frequencies
using Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning on two (or three) terminals simultaneously.
60Hz for the RH, 30Hz for the RM and 10Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned on ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again.
(Refer to page 51.)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1", Pr.
182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial values)
[FWD (or REV)] lamp is not lit ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check the wiring once again.
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".)
(Refer to page 53.)
Change the frequency of the terminal RL, RM, and RH. ... How?
Refer to page 79 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high
speed), Pr. 5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed), and Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed).
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON
ONONON
ON
Outputfrequency(Hz)
Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
Time
RH
RM
RL
Three-phase
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
RH
RM
RL
FR-DU07
,
SD
DisplayOperation
Flickering
2.Change the Pr. 79 setting to " ".
3.Press the start switch (or ).
FWD (or REV) flickers.
When the frequency command is not
given, it flickers.
Flickering
4.Turn on the low speed switch (RL).
The output frequency increases to 10Hz
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time.
5.Turn off the low speed switch (RL).
The output frequency decreases to 0Hz
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
6.Turn off the start switch .
FWD (or REV) turns off.
Low speed
Low speed

76
operation mode)
3.4.4 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input)
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to the frequency setting potentiometer.(Terminal 10))
POINT
Change the frequency (60Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5V, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 82.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. (Refer to
section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Three-phase
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
5
10
2
FR-DU07
,
DisplayOperation
CAUTION
When both the forward switch and reverse
switch turn on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switch turn on while running,
the inverter stops.
Flickering
( )
3.Start
Press the start switch (or ).
Operation status indication of FWD (or REV)
flickers.
Stop
Flickering
5.Deceleration
Turn the volume (frequency setting potentiometer)
counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication decreases
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time unitl
(0.00Hz) is displayed and operation status
indication of FWD or REV flickers.
The motor stops.
6.Stop
Press .
turns off.
4.Acceleration → constant speed
Turn the volume (frequency setting
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication increases
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time until
(60Hz) is displayed.
.
.

77
operation mode)
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.4.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input)
POINT
· Turn the AU signal on.
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
Change the frequency (60Hz) at the maximum value of potentiometer (at 20mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency. (Refer to page 84.)
Change the frequency (0Hz) at the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA, initial value)
Three-phase
5(-)
4(+)
AU
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
AU signal
FR-DU07
,
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
SD
CAUTION
When both the forward switch and reverse switch
turn on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switch turn on while running, the
inverter stops.
Flickering
( )
DisplayOperation
3.Start
Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) is on.
Press the start switch (or ).
FWD or REV of operation status indication flickers.
Stop
Flickering
5.Deceleration
Perform 4mA input.
The frequency value on the indication decreases
according to Pr. 8 Deceleration time until (0.00Hz) is
displayed and the operation status indication of FWD or
REV flickers.
The motor stops.
6.Stop
Press .
FWD or REV of the operation status indication turns off.
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
.
Perform 20mA input.
The frequency value on the indication increases
according to Pr. 7 Acceleration time until
(60.00Hz) is displayed.
.

78
Make a start and stop with terminals
(external operation)
3.5 Make a start and stop with terminals (external operation)
3.5.1 Use the set frequency set by the operation panel (Pr. 79 = 3)
POINT
From where is the frequency command given?
· Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the operation panel → Refer to 3.5.1(Refer to page 78)
· Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting) → Refer to 3.5.2 (Refer to page 79)
· Perform frequency setting by a voltage output device → Refer to 3.5.3 (Refer to page 81)
· Perform frequency setting by a current output device → Refer to 3.5.5 (Refer to page 83)
POINT [Connection diagram]
· Switch terminal STF(STR)-SD on to give a start
command.
· Set "3" in Pr. 79 (External/PU combined
operation mode 1).
· Refer to page 73 for the set frequency by the
operation panel.
REMARKS
· Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
(all are initial values)
· When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection is set to "3", multi-speed operation (refer to page 79) is also made valid.
When the inverter is stopped by of the operation panel (FR-DU07), and are
displayed alternately.
1. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
2. The display can be reset by .
Three-phase
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
FR-DU07
STR
Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start
STF
SD
DisplayOperation
3.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
•The motor runs at the frequency set in the set
frequency mode of the operation panel.
ON
4.Turn to change running frequency.
Display the frequency you want to set.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Stop
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
The motor decelerates according to Pr. 8 Deceleration
time to stop. OFF
Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!
5.While the value is flickering, press to set the
frequency.
If you do not press ,the value flickers for about
5s and the display then returns to 0.00 (display) Hz.
At this time, return to "Step 3" and set the frequency again.
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
Flickering

79
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.5.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command
(multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)
POINT
· Start command by terminal STF (STR)-SD
· Frequency command by terminal RH, RM, RL and STR-SD
· [EXT] must be lit. (When [PU] is lit, switch it to [EXT] with .)
· The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 60Hz, 30Hz, and 10Hz. (Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to change.)
· Operation at 7-speed can be performed by turning two (or three) terminals simultaneously. (Refer to section 4 of
Changing example Set "50Hz" in Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) and turn on terminal RH and STF (STR)-SD to
operate.
Three-phase
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
RH
RM
RL
Forward
rotation start
Reverse
rotation start
STF
STR
SD
ON
ON ON ON ON
ON ON
ONONON
ON
Outputfrequency(Hz)
Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
Speed 4
Speed 5
Speed 6
Speed 7
Time
RH
RM
RL
ON
DisplayOperation
1.Power on → operation mode check
For the initial setting, the inverter operates in
the external operation mode [EXT] when
powering on. Check that the operation
command indication is [EXT].
If not displayed, press to change to the
external [EXT] operation mode. If the operation
mode still does not change, set Pr. 79 to change to
the external operation mode.
ON
ON
StopOFF
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
High speed
Middle speed
Low speed
3.Turn on the high speed switch (RH).
5.Stop
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
The motor stops according to Pr. 8
Deceleration time.
• 30Hz appears when RM is on and 10Hz
appears when RL is on.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
4.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
50Hz appears.

80
[EXT] is not lit even when is pressed ... Why?
Switchover of the operation mode with is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value).
50Hz, 30Hz and 10Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned on. ... Why?
Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
Check for the setting of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency once again. (Refer to
page 51)
Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to page 53)
Check that Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection = "0", Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection = "1",
Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection = "2" and Pr. 59 Remote function selection = "0". (all are initial
values)
[FWD (or REV)] is not lit. ... Why?
Check that wiring is correct. Check it again.
Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 STR terminal
function selection)?
How is the frequency setting from 4 to 7 speed ?
The setting differs according to Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 (multi-speed setting). Refer to section 4 of
Perform multi-speed operation higher than 8 speed. ... How?
Use the REX signal to perform the operation. Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).
REMARKS
· External operation is fixed by setting "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection when you do not want to take
time pressing or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command. (Refer to page 53)

81
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.5.3 Perform frequency setting by analog (voltage input)
(The inverter supplies 5V of power to frequency setting potentiometer. (Terminal 10))
When you want to operate in the external operation mode always at powering on or when you want to
save the trouble of input, set "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection to
choose external operation mode always.
REMARKS
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection must be set to "61").
Three-phase
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
5
10
2
Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start
STF
STR
SD
CAUTION
2.Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
flickers.
4.Deceleration
potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value of the indication
decreases according to Pr. 8 Deceleration
time until (0.00Hz) is displayed.
The motor stops.
5.Stop
For the initial setting, the inverter operates
in the external operation mode [EXT] when
command indication is [EXT]. If not displayed,
press to change to the external [EXT]
operation mode. If the operation mode still
does not change, set Pr. 79 to change to the
external operation mode.
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
ON
OFF
ON
Flickering
Flickering
Stop
switch are on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switches turn on while running,
the inverter decelerates to stop.
DisplayOperation
.
potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.
The frequency value on the indication
increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until (60Hz) is displayed..
(Refer to page 53.)

82
(at 5V, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency?>
The motor will not rotate ... Why?
Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2".
Use to lit [EXT].
Check that wiring is correct. Check once again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0V, initial value)
When you want to compensate frequency setting, use terminal 1.
For details, refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).
Changing example When you want to use the 0 to 5VDC input frequency setting potentiometer to change the 5V-
time frequency from 60Hz (initial value) to 50Hz
Adjust to output 50Hz at 5V voltage input.
Set "50Hz" in Pr. 125.
The frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD does not indicate just 50Hz ... Why?
The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration. (Refer to section 4 of
Set frequency at 0V using calibration
parameter C2 and adjust the indicator using
calibration parameter C0.
(applied).)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across
terminals 2-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C4.)
4.Press to set.
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on and turn the volume
(frequency setting potentiometer) clockwise to full slowly.
1.Turn until (Pr. 125) appears.
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the monitor/frequency monitor.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to show the currently set value. (60.00Hz)
Flicker ··· 50Hz output at 5V input complete!!
3.Turn to change the set value
to " ". (50.00Hz)..
(Refer to 3.5.3 steps 2 to 5)
Outputfrequency
(Hz)
Pr.125
0
0
Frequency setting signal
100%
10V
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0 5V
C2
(Pr. 902)
C3 (Pr. 902) C4 (Pr. 903)
60Hz

83
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.5.5 Perform frequency setting by analog (current input)
POINT
· Switch terminal STF(STR)-SD on to give a start command.
· Turn the AU signal on.
· Set "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
REMARKS
Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
5(-)
4(+)
Three-phase
AC power supply
AU
Motor
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U
V
W
AU signal
STFForward rotation start
Reverse rotation start STR
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
SD
CAUTION
2.Start
Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.
FWD or REV of operation indication flickers.
5.Stop
For the initial setting, the inverter operates in
the external operation mode [EXT] when
command indication is [EXT]. If not displayed,
press to change to the external [EXT]
operation mode. If the operation mode still does
not change, set Pr. 79 to change to the external
operation mode.
DisplayOperation
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation Reverse
rotation
ON
OFF
ON
Flickering
Flickering
Stop
switch are on, the inverter will not start.
Also, if both switches turn on while running,
the inverter decelerates to stop.
4.Deceleration
Perform 4mA input.
decreases according to Pr. 8
Deceleration time until 0.00Hz is displayed
and FWD or REV of the operation status
indication flickers.
The motor stops.
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
Output of the
adjustment meter
(4 to 20mADC)
Perform 20mA input.
increases according to Pr. 7
Acceleration time until 60.00Hz is displayed.
(Refer to page 53.)

84
(at 20mA, initial value)
<How to change the maximum frequency?>
The motor will not rotate ... Why?
Check that [EXT] is lit.
[EXT] is valid when Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value) or "2".
Use to lit [EXT].
Check that the AU signal is on.
Turn the AU signal on.
Check that wiring is orrect. Check it again.
Change the frequency (0Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4mA, initial value)
Adjust the frequency in calibration parameter C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.
Changing example When you want to use the 4 to 20mA input frequency setting potentiometer to change the 20mA-
time frequency from 60Hz (initial value) to 50Hz
Adjust to output 50Hz at 20mA current input.
Set "50Hz" in Pr. 126.
The frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals FM-SD does not indicate just 50Hz ... Why?
The meter can be adjusted by calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
Set frequency at 4mA using calibration
parameter C5 and adjust the indicator using
calibration parameter C0.
(applied).)
REMARKS
As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with a voltage applied to across
terminals 4-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied.
(Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied) for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)
PU
EXT
4.Press to set the value.
6.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on to allow
20mA current to flow.
1.Turn until (Pr. 126) appears.
5.Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the
monitor/frequency monitor.
DisplayOperation
2.Press to show the currently set value.
(60.00Hz)
3.Turn to change the set value to " ".
(50.00Hz)
Flicker ··· 50Hz output at 20mA input complete!!
(Refer to 3.5.5 steps 2 to 5)
Outputfrequency
(Hz)
Pr. 126
0
Frequency setting signal
100%
Initial value
Bias
Gain
0
20
4 20mA
C5
(Pr. 904)
C6 (Pr. 904) C7 (Pr. 905)
60Hz

85
Parameter List
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
3.6 Parameter List
3.6.1 List of parameters classified by purpose of use
Set the parameters according to the operating conditions. The following list indicates purpose of use and
corresponding parameters.
Purpose of Use Parameter Number
Control mode Change the control method Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 451, Pr. 800
Speed control by real
sensorless vector control and
vector control
Torque limit level setting for speed control
Pr. 22, Pr. 803, Pr. 810 to Pr. 817,
Pr. 858, Pr. 868, Pr. 874
To perform high accuracy/fast response operation (gain
adjustment of real sensorless vector control and vector
control)
Pr. 818 to Pr. 821, Pr. 830, Pr. 831,
Pr. 880
Speed feed forward control, model adaptive speed control Pr. 828, Pr. 877 to Pr. 881
Torque bias function Pr. 840 to Pr. 848
Prevent the motor from overrunning Pr. 285, Pr. 853, Pr. 873
Notch filter Pr. 862, Pr. 863
Torque control by real
sensorless vector control and
vector control
Torque command Pr. 803 to Pr. 806
Speed limit Pr. 807 to Pr.809
Gain adjustment for torque control Pr. 824, Pr. 825, Pr. 834, Pr. 835
Position control by vector
control
Conditional position feed function by contact input Pr. 419, Pr. 464 to Pr. 494
Position control by pulse train input of the inverter Pr. 419, Pr. 428 to Pr. 430
Setting the electronic gear Pr. 420, Pr. 421, Pr. 424
Setting of positioning adjustment parameter Pr. 426, Pr. 427
Gain adjustment of position control Pr. 422, Pr. 423, Pr. 425
Adjust the output torque of
the motor (current)
Manual torque boost Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89, Pr. 453, Pr. 454,
Pr. 569
Real sensorless vector control Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 451, Pr. 800
Slip compensation Pr. 245 to Pr. 247
Stall prevention operation
Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66,
Pr. 114, Pr. 115, Pr. 148, Pr. 149,
Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 858,
Pr. 868
Torque limit
Pr. 22, Pr. 803, Pr. 810, Pr. 812 to
Pr. 817, Pr. 858, Pr. 868, Pr. 874
Limit the output frequency
Maximum/minimum frequency Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18
Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jump) Pr. 31 to Pr. 36
Speed limit Pr. 807 to Pr. 809
Set V/F pattern
Base frequency, voltage Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47, Pr. 113
V/F pattern matching applications Pr. 14
Adjustable 5 points V/F Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109
Frequency setting with
terminals (contact input)
Multi-speed setting operation
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting Pr. 28
Remote setting function Pr. 59

86
Parameter List
time/pattern adjustment
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44,
Pr. 45, Pr. 110, Pr. 111
Starting frequency Pr. 13, Pr. 571
Acceleration/deceleration pattern and backlash measures
Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143, Pr.380 to
Pr. 383, Pr. 516 to Pr. 519
Set a shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration time
automatically.
(Automatic acceleration/deceleration)
Pr. 61 to Pr. 64, Pr. 292, Pr. 293
Regeneration avoidance functions at deceleration Pr. 882 to Pr. 886, Pr. 665
Selection and protection of a
motor
Motor protection from overheat (electronic thermal relay
function)
Pr. 9, Pr. 51
Use the constant torque motor (applied motor) Pr. 71, Pr. 450
Offline auto tuning
Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94,
Pr. 96, Pr. 455 to Pr. 463, Pr. 684,
Pr. 859, Pr. 860
Online auto tuning Pr. 95, Pr. 574
Easy gain tuning Pr. 818, Pr. 819
Motor brake and stop
operation
DC injection brake Pr. 10 to Pr. 12, Pr. 850
Selection of regeneration unit and DC current feeding Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Selection of motor stopping method Pr. 250
Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294
Stop-on-contact control Pr. 6, Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276
Brake sequence function Pr. 278 to Pr. 285, Pr. 292
Function assignment of
external terminal and control
Function assignment of input terminal Pr. 178 to Pr. 189
Start signal selection Pr. 250
Logic selection of output stop signal (MRS) Pr. 17
Selection of action conditions of the second (third) function
signal (RT(X9))
Pr. 155
Terminal assignment of output terminal Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2, FU3, FB,
FB2, FB3, LS signal)
Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116,
Pr. 865
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167
Remote output function (REM signal) Pr. 495 to Pr. 497
Monitor display and monitor
output signal
Speed display and speed setting Pr. 37, Pr. 144
Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions
Cumulative monitor clear
Pr. 52, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 563,
Pr. 564, Pr. 891
Change of the monitor output from terminal FM and AM
Pr. 54 to Pr. 56, Pr. 158, Pr. 866,
Pr. 867
Adjustment of terminal FM and AM (calibration) C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901)
Energy saving monitor Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Detection of output
frequency, current and
torque
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2, FU3, FB,
FB2, FB3, LS signal)
Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 116,
Pr. 865
Detection of output current (Y12 signal)
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)
Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167
Torque detection (TU signal) Pr. 864
Operation selection at power
failure and instantaneous
power failure
Restart operation after instantaneous power failure/Flying
start
Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165,
Pr. 299, Pr. 611
Decelerate the motor to a stop at instantaneous power failure Pr. 261 to Pr. 266, Pr. 294
Operation setting at alarm
occurrence
Retry function at alarm occurrence Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69
Output function of alarm code Pr. 76
Input/output phase failure protection selection Pr. 251, Pr. 872
Fault definition Pr. 875
Regeneration avoidance function Pr. 882 to Pr. 886, Pr. 665

87
Parameter List
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Energy saving operation
Energy saving control selection Pr. 60
How much energy can be saved (energy saving monitor) Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Reduction of the motor noise
Measures against noise and
leakage currents
Carrier frequency and SoftPWM selection Pr. 72, Pr. 240
Noise elimination at the analog input
Pr. 74, Pr. 822, Pr. 826, Pr. 832,
Pr. 836, Pr. 849
Frequency setting by analog
input
Analog input selection Pr. 73, Pr. 267
Override function Pr. 73, Pr. 252, Pr. 253
Noise elimination at the analog input
Pr. 74, Pr. 822, Pr. 826, Pr. 832,
Pr. 836, Pr. 849
Change of analog input frequency,
adjustment of voltage, current input and frequency
(calibration)
Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241,
C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)
Compensation at the analog input Pr. 242, Pr. 243
Misoperation prevention and
parameter setting restriction
Reset selection, disconnected PU detection Pr. 75
Prevention of parameter rewrite Pr. 77
Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor Pr. 78
Display necessary parameters only. (user group) Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174
Control of parameter write by communication Pr. 342
Selection of operation mode
and operation location
Operation mode selection Pr. 79
Operation mode when power is on Pr. 79, Pr. 340
Operation command source and speed command source
during communication operation
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
Selection of the NET mode operation control source Pr. 550
Selection of the PU mode operation control source Pr. 551
Communication operation
and setting
PU connector communication
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337,
Pr. 341
Control of parameter write by communication Pr. 342
ModbusRTU communication specifications Pr. 343, Pr. 539
Operation command source and speed command source
during communication operation
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
Use setup software (USB communication) Pr. 547, Pr. 548
Selection of the NET mode operation control source Pr. 550
ModbusRTU protocol (communication protocol selection) Pr. 549
Special operation and
frequency control
PID control Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577
Switch between the inverter operation and commercial
power-supply operation to use
Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159
Operate at a high speed when a load is light.
(load torque high speed frequency control)
Pr. 4, Pr. 5, Pr. 270 to Pr. 274
Droop control Pr. 286 to Pr. 288
Frequency control by pulse train input Pr. 291, Pr. 384 to Pr. 386
Useful functions
Free parameter Pr. 888, Pr. 889
Increase cooling fan life Pr. 244
To determine the maintenance time of parts. Pr. 255 to Pr. 259, Pr. 503, Pr. 504
How much energy can be saved (energy saving monitor) Pr. 60, Pr. 891 to Pr. 899
Setting from the parameter
unit and operation panel
Parameter unit language switchover Pr. 145
Operation selection of the operation panel Pr. 161
Buzzer control of the operation panel Pr. 990
Contrast adjustment of the parameter unit Pr. 991

88
Parameter List
3.6.2 Parameter list
· indicates simple mode parameters.
· The abbreviations in the explanations below indicate:
...V/F control
...advanced magnetic flux vector control
...real sensorless vector control
...vector control.
(Parameters without any indication are valid for all control)
· " " indicates enabled and "×" indicates disabled of "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
Manualtorqueboost
0 Torque boost 0.1%
6/4/3/2/
1% *
0 to 30%
Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.
* The initial value differs according to the
inverter capacity. (0.4K, 0.75K / 1.5K to
3.7K / 5.5K, 7.5K / 11K to 55K / 75K or
more )
46
Second torque
boost
0.1% 9999
0 to 30%
Set the torque boost when the RT signal is
on.
9999 Without second torque boost
112 Third torque boost 0.1% 9999
0 to 30%
Set the torque boost when the X9 signal is
on.
9999 Without third torque boost
Maximum/minimum
frequency
1
Maximum
frequency
0.01Hz
120/
60Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
inverter capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
2 Minimum frequency 0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
18
High speed
maximum
frequency
0.01Hz
120/
60Hz*
120 to 400Hz
Set when performing the operation at
120Hz or more.
inverter capacity. (55K or less/75k or more)
Basefrequency,voltage
3 Base frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency when the motor rated
torque is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)
19
Base frequency
voltage
0.1V 9999
0 to 1000V Set the base voltage.
8888 95% of power supply voltage
9999 Same as power supply voltage
47
Second V/F (base
frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz
Set the base frequency when the RT signal
is on.
9999 Second V/F is invalid
113
Third V/F (base
frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz
Set the base frequency when the X9 signal
is ON.
9999 Third V/F is invalid
Multi-speedsettingoperation
4
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RH signal is on.
5
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RM signal is on.
6
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
0.01Hz 10Hz 0 to 400Hz Set frequency when the RL signal is on.
24
27
Multi-speed setting
(4 speed to 7
speed)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999 Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can
be set according to the combination of the
RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
9999: not selected
232
239
Multi-speed setting
(8 speed to 15
speed)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
V/FV/FV/F
Magnetic fluxMagnetic fluxMagnetic flux
SensorlessSensorlessSensorless
VectorVectorVector
V/FV/FV/F
V/FV/FV/F
to
to

89
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Acceleration/decelerationtimesetting
7 Acceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5/15s *
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the motor acceleration time.
inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or
more)
8 Deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5/15s *
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the motor deceleration time.
inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K or
more)
20
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 1 to 400Hz
Set the frequency referenced as
acceleration/deceleration time. Set the
frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20
for acceleration/deceleration time.
21
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increments
1 0
0
Increments: 0.1s
Range: 0 to 3600s
The increments
and setting range
of acceleration/
deceleration time
setting can be
changed.
1
Increments: 0.01s
Range: 0 to 360s
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
5s
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time
when the RT signal is on.
45
Second
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
9999
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the deceleration time when the RT signal
is on.
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
110
Third acceleration/
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time
when the X9 signal is on.
9999 Function invalid
111
Third deceleration
time
0.1/
0.01Hz
9999
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the deceleration time when the X9
signal is on.
9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
Motorprotection
fromoverheat
(electronicthermal
relayfunction)
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
0.01/
0.1A *
Inverter
rated
current
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
* The increments and setting range differ
according to the inverter capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
51
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
0.01/
0.1A *
9999
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
Made valid when the RT signal is on.
less/75k or more)
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
DCinjectionbrake
10
DC injection brake
operation frequency
0.01Hz 3/0.5Hz*
0 to 120Hz
Set the operation frequency of the DC
injection brake.
* The initial value changes from 3Hz to
0.5Hz when a control mode other than
vector is changed to vector control.
9999
Operate when the output frequency
becomes less than or equal to Pr. 13
Starting frequency.
11
DC injection brake
operation time
0.1s 0.5s
0 DC injection brake disabled
0.1 to 10s
Set the operation time of the DC injection
brake.
8888 Operated while the X13 signal is on.
12
DC injection brake
operation voltage
0.1% 4/2/1% *
0 DC injection brake disabled
0.1 to 30%
Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).
inverter capacity. (7.5K or less/11K to 55K/
75K or more)
802
Pre-excitation
selection
1 0
0 Zero speed control Setting can be made
under vector control.1 Servo lock
850
Brake operation
selection
1 0
0 DC injection brake
1
Zero speed control (under real sensorless
vector control)
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

90
Parameter List
Startingfrequency
13 Starting frequency 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz Starting frequency can be set.
571
Holding time at a
start
0.1s 9999
0.0 to 10.0s
Set the holding time of Pr. 13 Starting
frequency.
9999 Holding function at a start is invalid
V/Fpatternmatching
applications
14
Load pattern
selection
1 0
0 For constant torque load
1 For variable-torque load
2
For constant torque
lift
Boost for reverse
rotation 0%
3
Boost for forword
rotation 0%
4
RT signal ON ....For constant-torque load
(Same as in setting 0)
RT signal OFF...For constant-torque lift
Boost for reverse rotation 0%
5
RT signal ON ....For constant-torque load
RT signal OFF...For constant-torque lift
Boost for forward rotation 0%
Jogoperation
15 Jog frequency 0.01Hz 5Hz 0 to 400Hz Set the frequency for jog operation.
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
0.1/
0.01s
0.5s
0 to 3600/
360s
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for
jog operation. Set the time taken to reach
the frequency set in Pr. 20 Acceleration/
deceleration reference frequency for
acceleration/deceleration time. (Initial
value is 60Hz)
In addition, acceleration/deceleration time
can not be set separately.
Logicselection
ofoutputstop
signal(MRS)
17 MRS input selection 1 0
0 Open input always
2
Normally closed input (NC contact input
specifications)
4
External terminal:Normally closed input
(NC contact input
specifications)
Communication.:Normally open input
—
18 Refer to Pr. 1 and Pr. 2.
19 Refer to Pr. 3.
20, 21 Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/F

91
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Stallpreventionoperation
22
Stall prevention
operation level
0.1% 150%
0
Stall prevention operation selection
becomes invalid.
0.1 to 400%
Function as stall prevention operation
under V/F control and advanced magnetic
flux vector control.
Set the current value at which stall
prevention operation is started.
Refer to page 92 for torque limit level.
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed
0.1% 9999
0 to 200%
The stall operation level can be reduced
when operating at a high speed above the
rated frequency.
9999 Constant according to Pr. 22
48
Second stall
prevention
operation current
0.1% 150%
0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 220%
The stall prevention operation level can be
set.
49
Second stall
prevention
operation frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz
0 Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.01 to
400Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention
operation of Pr. 48 is started.
9999 Pr.48 is valid when the RT signal is on.
66
Stall prevention
operation reduction
starting frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the stall
operation level is started to reduce.
114
Third stall
prevention
operation current
0.1% 150%
0 Third stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to
220%
The stall prevention operation level can be
set.
115
Thrid stall
prevention
operation frequency
0.01Hz 0
0 Third stall prevention operation invalid
0.01 to
400Hz
Set the frequency at which stall prevention
operation of Pr. 114 is started.
148
Stall prevention
level at 0V input
0.1% 150% 0 to 220% When "4" is set in Pr. 868 (Pr. 858), stall
prevention operation level can be changed
by the analog signal input to terminal 1
(terminal 4).149
Stall prevention
level at 10V input
0.1% 200% 0 to 220%
154
Voltage reduction
selection during
stall prevention
operation
1 1
0
With voltage
reduction
You can select
whether to use
output voltage
reduction during
stall prevention
operation or not.
1
Without voltage
reduction
156
Stall prevention
operation selection
1 0
0 to 31,
100, 101
Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use
stall prevention or not according to the
acceleration/deceleration status.
157
OL signal output
timer
0.1s 0s
0 to 25s
Set the output start time of the OL signal
output when stall prevention is activated.
9999 Without the OL signal output
858
Terminal 4 function
assignment
Refer to page 124.
868
Terminal 1 function
assignment
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/FMagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticflux

92
Parameter List
Torquelimitlevel
22 Torque limit level 0.1%
150/
200% *
0 to 400%
This functions as torque limit level under
real sensorless vector control.
* For the 3.7K or less, the initial value changes
from 150% to 200% when V/F control or
advanced magnetic flux vector is changed to
real sensorless vector control or vector control.
Refer to page 91 for stall prevention
operation level.
803
Constant power
range torque
characteristic
selection
1 0
0
Constant output limit (torque current limit
and control)
1
Constant torque limit (torque limit and
control)
810
Torque limit input
method selection
1 0
0
Internal torque limit
Parameter-set torque limit operation is
performed.
1
External torque limit
Torque limit based on the analog input
from terminal 1 and 4.
811
Set resolution
switchover
1 0
Running speed
increments
Torque limit
increments
0 1r/min
0.1% increments
1 0.1r/min
10 1r/min
0.01% increments
11 0.1r/min
812
Torque limit level
(regeneration)
0.1% 9999
0 to 400%
Set the torque limit level for forward
rotation regeneration.
9999 Pr. 22 value is used for limit.
813
Torque limit level
(3rd quadrant)
0.1% 9999
0 to 400%
Set the torque limit level for reverse
rotation driving.
814
Torque limit level
(4th quadrant)
0.1% 9999
0 to 400%
Set the torque limit level for reverse
rotation regeneration.
815 Torque limit level 2 0.1% 9999
0 to 400%
When the torque limit selection (TL) signal
is on, the Pr. 815 value is a torque limit
value regardless of Pr. 810.
9999 Depending on Pr. 22 setting
816
Torque limit level
during acceleration
0.1% 9999
0 to 400%
Set the torque limit value during
acceleration.
9999 Same torque limit as at constant speed
817
Torque limit level
during deceleration
0.1% 9999
0 to 400%
Set the torque limit value during
deceleration.
9999 Same torque limit as at constant speed
874 OLT level setting 0.1% 150% 0 to 200%
This function can make an alarm stop if the
torque limit is activated to stall the motor.
Set the output torque at which an alarm
stop is made in Pr. 874 .
— 24 to 27 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
Inputcompensation
ofmulti-speedand
remotesetting
28
Multi-speed input
compensation
selection
1 0
0 Without compensation
1 With compensation
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
SensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector

93
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
patternandbacklashmeasures
29 Acceleration/
deceleration pattern
selection
1 0
0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
3 Backlash measures
4 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
5 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D
140
Backlash acceleration
stopping frequency
0.01Hz 1Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the stopping frequency and time for
backlash measures.
Valid when Pr. 29 = "3"
141
Backlash acceleration
stopping time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s
142
Backlash deceleration
stopping frequency
0.01Hz 1Hz 0 to 400Hz
143
Backlash deceleration
stopping time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 360s
380
Acceleration S-
pattern 1
1% 0% 0 to 50%
Valid when S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration C (Pr. 29 = 4) is set.
Set the time taken for S-pattern from
starting of acceleration/deceleration to
linear acceleration as % to the
acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8,
etc.)
An acceleration/deceleration pattern can
be changed with the X20 signal.
381
Deceleration S-
pattern 1
1% 0% 0 to 50%
382
Acceleration S-
pattern 2
1% 0% 0 to 50%
383
Deceleration S-
pattern 2
1% 0% 0 to 50%
516
S-pattern time at a
start of acceleration
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
Valid when S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration D (Pr. 29 = 5) is set.
Set the time taken for S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration (S-pattern
operation).
517
S-pattern time at a
completion of
acceleration
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
518
S-pattern time at a
start of deceleraiton
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
519
S-pattern time at a
completion of
deceleraiton
0.1s 0.1s 0.1 to 2.5s
Selectionofregenerationunit
30
Regenerative
function selection
1 0
0
Built-in brake, brake unit (FR-BU2 [FR-BU2/
BU mode], FR-BU, BU)
1
High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR),
Brake unit (FR-BU2 [MT-BU5 mode], MT-BU5),
Power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
2
High power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC),
Power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV)
10
Built-in brake unit, brake
unit (FR-BU2 [FR-BU2/BU
mode], FR-BU, BU) DC feeding mode 1
(operated by DC
feeding only)
11
(FR-ABR), brake unit
(FR-BU2 [MT-BU5 mode],
MT-BU5)
20
Built-in brake unit, brake
unit (FR-BU2 [FR-BU2/BU
mode], FR-BU, BU)
DC feeding mode 2
(operated by
switching between
AC and DC)21
(FR-ABR), brake unit
(FR-BU2 [MT-BU5 mode],
MT-BU5)
70
Special regenerative
brake duty
0.1% 0%
0 to 30/
0 to 10%*
You can set the brake duty when a brake
unit or power regeneration converter is
used.
* Range differ according to the inverter
capacity. (55K or less/75K or more)
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

94
Parameter List
Avoidmechanical
resonancepoints
(frequencyjump)
31 Frequency jump 1A 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency
jumps
9999: Function invalid
32 Frequency jump 1B 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
Speeddisplayand
speedsetting
37 Speed display 1 0
0 Frequency display, setting
1 to 9998
Set the machine speed for Pr.505 Set
frequency.
144
Speed setting
switchover
1 4
0, 2, 4, 6,
8, 10, 102,
104, 106,
108, 110
Set the number of motor poles when
displaying the motor speed.
A setting value is automatically changed
depending on the Pr.81 setting.
505
Speed setting
reference
0.01Hz 60Hz 1 to 120Hz
Set the frequency that will be the basis of
machine speed display.
811
Easy gain tuning
response level
setting
1 0
Running speed
increments
Torque limit
increments
0 1r/min
0.1% increments
1 0.1r/min
10 1r/min
0.01% increments
11 0.1r/min
Detectionofoutputfequecnyandmotorspeed
(SU,FU,FU2,FU3,FB,FB2,FB3,LSsignal)
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
0.1% 10% 0 to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns on.
42
Output frequency
detection
0.01Hz 6Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU (FB)
signal turns on.
43
Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU (FB)
signal turns on in reverse rotation.
9999 Same as Pr. 42 setting
50
Second output
frequency detection
0.01Hz 30Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU2 (FB2)
signal turns on.
116
Third output
frequency detection
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the FU3 (FB3)
signal turns on.
865
Low speed
detection
0.01Hz 1.5Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency where the LS signal
turns on.
—
46 Refer to Pr. 0.
47 Refer to Pr. 3.
50 Refer to Pr. 41 to Pr. 43.
51 Refer to Pr. 9.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

95
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
ChangeofDU/PUmonitordescriptions
Cumulativemonitorclear
52
DU/PU main display
data selection
1 0
0, 5 to 14,
17 to 20,
22 to 25,
32 to 35,
50 to 57,100
Select monitor to be displayed on the
operation panel and parameter unit and
monitor to be output to the terminal FM and
AM.
0 : Output frequency (Pr. 52)
1 : Output frequency (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
2 : Output current (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
3 : Output voltage (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
5 : Frequency setting
6 : Running speed
7 : Motor torque
8 : Converter output voltage
9 : Regenerative brake duty
10 : Electronic thermal relay function load
factor
11 : Output current peak value
12 : Converter output voltage peak value
13 : Input power
14 : Output power
17 : Load meter
18 : Motor excitation current
19 : Position pulse* (Pr. 52)
20 : Cumulative energization time (Pr. 52)
21 : Reference voltage output (Pr. 54, Pr. 158)
22 : Orientation status* (Pr. 52)
23 : Actual operation time (Pr. 52)
24 : Motor load factor
25 : Cumulative power (Pr. 52)
32 : Torque command
33 : Torque current command
34 : Motor output
35 : Feedback pulse* (Pr. 52)
50 : Power saving effect
51 : Cumulative saving power (Pr. 52)
52 : PID set point
53 : PID measured value
54 : PID deviation (Pr. 52)
55 : Input/output terminal status (Pr. 52)
56 : Option input terminal status (Pr. 52)
57 : Option output terminal status (Pr. 52)
100 : Set frequency is displayed during a
stop and output frequency is displayed
during operation (Pr. 52)
* Available only when the FR-A7AP is
mounted.
54
FM terminal
function selection
1 1
1 to 3, 5 to
14, 17, 18,
21, 24,
32 to 34,
50, 52, 53
158
AM terminal
function selection
1 1
1 to 3, 5 to
14, 17, 18,
21, 24, 32 to
34, 50, 52,
53
170
Watt-hour meter
clear
1 9999
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
×
10
Set the maximum value when monitoring
from communication to 0 to 9999kWh.
9999
Set the maximum value when monitoring
from communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
171
Operation hour
meter clear
1 9999 0, 9999
Set "0" in the parameter to clear the watt-
hour monitor.
Setting "9999" has no effect.
× × ×
268
Monitor decimal
digits selection
1 9999
0 Displays the monitor as integral value.
1 Displays the monitor in increments of 0.1.
9999 No fixed decimal position
563
Energization time
carrying-over times
1 0
(0 to
65535)
The numbers of cumulative energization time
monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed.
Reading only
× × ×
564
Operating time
carrying-over times
1 0
(0 to
65535)
The numbers of operation time monitor
exceeded 65535h is displayed.
Reading only
× × ×
867 AM output filter 0.01s 0.01s 0 to 5s Set the output filter of terminal AM.
891
Cumulative power
monitor digit shifted
times
1 9999
0 to 4
Set the number of times to shift the
cumulative power monitor digit.
Clamp the monitor value at maximum.
9999
No shift
Clear the monitor value when it exceeds
the maximum value.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

96
Parameter List
Changeofthemonitor
outputfromterminal
FMandAM
55
Frequency
monitoring reference
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the full-scale value to output the output
frequency monitor value to terminal FM
and AM.
56
Current monitoring
reference
0.01/
0.1A *
Inverter
rated
current
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
Set the full-scale value to output the output
current monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
less/75k or more)
866
Torque monitoring
reference
0.1% 150% 0 to 400%
Set the full-scale value to output the torque
monitor value to terminal FM and AM.
Restartoperation
afterinstantaneous
powerfailure
57
Restart coasting
time
0.1s 9999
0
The coasting time is as follows:
1.5K or less................................... 0.5s,
2.2K to 7.5K .................................. 1.0s,
11K to 55K .................................... 3.0s,
75K or more.................................. 5.0s
0.1 to 5s/
0.1 to 30s *
Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered
restart after an instantaneous power failure.
* The setting range differs according to the
inverter capacity (55K or less/75k or more)
9999 No restart
58 Restart cushion time 0.1s 1s 0 to 60s Set a voltage starting time at restart.
162
Automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
selection
1 0
0 With frequency search
1
Without frequency search (Reduced
voltage system)
2 Encoder detection frequency
10 Frequency search at every start
11 Reduced voltage system at every start
12 Encoder detection frequency at every start
163
First cushion time
for restart
0.1s 0s 0 to 20s Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider according to the magnitude of
load (inertia moment/torque).164
First cushion
voltage for restart
0.1% 0% 0 to 100%
165
Stall prevention
operation level for
restart
0.1% 150% 0 to 220%
Consider the rated inverter current as
100% and set the stall prevention
operation level during restart operation.
299
Rotation direction
detection selection
at restarting
1 0
0 Without rotation direction detection
1 With rotation direction detection
9999
When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is
detected.
When Pr. 78 = "1", "2", the rotation direction
is not detected.
611
Acceleration time at
a restart
0.1s 5/15s *
0 to 3600s
Set the acceleration
time to reach the set
frequency at a restart.
* The initial value
differs according
to the inverter
capacity. (55K or
less/75k or more)
9999
Acceleration time for
restart is the normal
acceleration time
(e.g. Pr. 7 ).
Remotesettingfunction
59
Remote function
selection
1 0
0
RH, RM, RL signal
function
Frequency setting
storage function
Multi-speed setting ⎯
1 Remote setting Yes
2 Remote setting No
3 Remote setting
No(TurningSTF/STR
off clears remotely-
set frequency.)
Energysaving
controlselection
60
Energy saving
control selection
1 0
0 Normal operation mode
4 Energy saving operation mode
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/F

97
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Automaticacceleration/deceleration
61 Reference current
0.01/
0.1A*
9999
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A*
Setting value (rated motor current) is referenced
less/75k or more)
9999 Rated inverter current is referenced
62
Reference value at
acceleration
0.1% 9999
0 to 220%
Setting value is a limit
value
Shortest acceleration/
deceleration mode
Setting value is an
optimum value
Optimum
acceleration/
deceleration mode
9999
150% is a limit value
deceleration mode
100% is an optimum
value
Optimum
acceleration/
deceleration mode
63
Reference value at
deceleration
0.1% 9999
0 to 220%
Setting value is a limit
value
deceleration mode
Setting value is an
optimum value
Optimum
acceleration/
deceleration mode
9999
150% is a limit value
deceleration mode
100% is an optimum
value
Optimum
acceleration/
deceleration mode
64
Starting frequency
for elevator mode
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 10Hz 0 to 10Hz are starting frequency
9999 2Hz is starting frequency
292
Automatic
acceleration/
deceleration
1 0
0 Normal mode
1 Shortest acceleration/
deceleration mode
Without brake
11 With brake
3 Optimum acceleration/deceleration mode
5 Elevator mode 1
6 Elevator mode 2
7 Brake sequence mode 1
8 Brake sequence mode 2
293
Acceleration/
deceleration
separate selection
1 0
0
Calculate acceleration/deceleration time of
both acceleration and deceleration for the
shortest and optimum acceleration/
deceleration mode.
1
Calculate only acceleration time for the
deceleration mode
2
Calculate only deceleration time for the
deceleration mode
Retryfunctionatalarmoccurrence
65 Retry selection 1 0 0 to 5 An alarm for retry can be selected.
67
Number of retries at
alarm occurrence
1 0
0 No retry function
1 to 10
Set the number of retries at alarm
occurrence. An alarm output is not provided
during retry operation.
101 to 110
Set the number of retries at alarm
occurrence. (The setting value minus 100 is
the number of retries.) An alarm output is
provided during retry operation.
68 Retry waiting time 0.1s 1s 0 to 10s
Set the waiting time from when an inverter
alarm occurs until a retry is made.
69
Retry count display
erase
1 0 0
Clear the number of restarts succeeded by
retry.
—
67 to 69 Refer to Pr. 65.
70 Refer to Pr. 30.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

98
Parameter List
Motorselection
(appliedmotor)
71 Applied motor 1 0
0 Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
1
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor
2
Thermal characteristic of standard motor
Adjustable 5 points V/F
20
Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 4P
1.5kW or less)
30
Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi
vector motor SF-V5RU
40
Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi high
efficiency motor (SF-HR)
50
Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi
constant-torque motor (SF-HRCA)
3 Standard motor
Select "offline auto
tuning setting"
13 Constant-torque motor
23
Mitsubishi standard
motor (SF-JR 4P
1.5kW or less)
33
Mitsubishi vector motor
(SF-V5RU/SF-THY)
43
Mitsubishi high
efficiency motor (SF-
HR)
53
torque motor (SF-
HRCA)
4 Standard motor
Auto tuning data
can be read,
changed, and set.
24
Mitsubishi standard
motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5kW
or less)
34
Mitsubishi vector motor
(SF-V5RU/SF-THY)
44
Mitsubishi high
efficiency motor (SF-
HR)
54
torque motor (SF-
HRCA)
5 Standard motor Star connection
Direct input of
motor constants is
enabled
6 Standard motor Delta connection
Direct input of
motor constants is
enabled
7 Standard motor Star connection
Motor constants
direct input
+
Offline auto tuning
8 Standard motor Delta connection
Motor constants
direct input
+
Offline auto tuning
450
Second applied
motor
1 9999
0 to 8,
13 to 18,
20, 23, 24,
30, 33, 34,
40, 43, 44,
50, 53, 54
Set when using the second motor.
(same specifications as Pr. 71)
9999 Second motor is invalid
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

99
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Carrierfrequency
andSoftPWM
selection
72
PWM frequency
selection
1 2
0 to 15/
0 to 6, 25 *
PWM carrier frequency can be changed.
The setting displayed is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz, 15 indicates
14.5kHz, 25 indicates 2.5. (25 is
exclusively for a sine wave filter.)
The following settings are for real
sensorless vector control and vector
control.
0 to 5: 2kHz, 6 to 9: 6kHz,
10 to 13: 10kHz, 14 to 15: 14kHz
240
Soft-PWM
operation selection
1 1
0 Soft-PWM invalid
1
When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for the 75K
or more), Soft-PWM is valid.
Analoginputselection
73
Analog input
selection
1 1
0 to 7,
10 to 17
You can select the input specifications of
terminal 2 (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA)
and input specifications of terminal 1 (0 to
±5V, 0 to ±10V).
To change the terminal 2 to the voltage
input specification (0 to 5V/ 0 to 10V), turn
OFF (initial status) the voltage/current
input switch 2. To change it to the current
input (0 to 20mA), turn ON the voltage/
current input switch 2.
Override and reversible operation can be
selected.
×
242
Terminal 1 added
compensation
amount (terminal 2)
0.1% 100% 0 to 100%
Set the ratio of added compensation
amount when terminal 2 is the main speed.
243
Terminal 1 added
compensation
amount (terminal 4)
0.1% 75% 0 to 100%
Set the ratio of added compensation
amount when terminal 4 is the main speed.
252 Override bias 0.1% 50% 0 to 200%
Set the bias side compensation value of
override function.
253 Override gain 0.1% 150% 0 to 200%
Set the gain side compensation value of
override function.
267
Terminal 4 input
selection
1 0
0
Terminal 4 input
4 to 20mA
Turn ON the
voltage/current
input switch
1(initial status).
×
1
Terminal 4 input
0 to 5V
Turn OFF the
voltage/current
input switch 1.2
Terminal 4 input
0 to 10V
Responselevelofanaloginput
andnoiseelimination
74
Input filter time
constant
1 1 0 to 8
The primary delay filter time constant for
the analog input can be set.
A larger setting results in a larger filter.
822 Speed setting filter 1 0.001s 9999
0 to 5s,
9999
Set the time constant of the primary delay
filter relative to the external speed
command (analog input command).
826 Torque setting filter 1 0.001s 9999
0 to 5s,
9999
filter relative to the external torque
command (analog input command).
832 Speed setting filter 2 0.001s 9999
0 to 5s,
9999
Second function of Pr. 822 (valid when the
RT terminal is on)
836 Torque setting filter 2 0.001s 9999
0 to 5s,
9999
RT terminal is on)
849
Analog input offset
adjustment
0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
This function provides speed command by
analog input (terminal 2) with offset and
avoids frequency command to be given
due to noise under 0 speed command.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

100
Parameter List
Resetselection,
disconnectedPU
detection
75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
1 14
0 to 3,
14 to 17
You can select the reset input acceptance,
disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07/FR-
PU04) connector detection function and PU
stop function.
For the initial value, reset always enabled,
without disconnected PU detection, and
with PU stop function are set.
× ×
Outputfunction
ofalarmcode
76
Alarm code output
selection
1 0
0 Without alarm code output
1 With alarm code output
2
Alarm code output at alarm occurrence
only
Preventionof
parameter
rewrite
77
Parameter write
selection
1 0
0 Write is enabled only during a stop
1 Parameter write is disabled.
2
Parameter write is enabled in any
operation mode regardless of operation
status.
Preventionof
reverserotation
ofthemotor
78
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
1 0
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
1 Reverse rotation disallowed
2 Forward rotation disallowed
Operationmodeselection
79
Operation mode
selection
1 0
0 External/PU switchover mode
1 Fixed to PU operation mode
2 Fixed to External operation mode
3 External/PU combined operation mode 1
4 External/PU combined operation mode 2
6 Switchover mode
7
External operation mode (PU operation
interlock)
340
Communication
startup mode
selection
1 0
0 As set in Pr. 79.
1, 2
Started in the network operation mode.
When the setting is "2", it will resume the
pre-instantaneous power failure operation
mode after an instantaneous power failure
occurs.
10, 12
Started in the network operation mode.
Operation mode can be changed between
the PU operation mode and network
operation mode from the operation panel.
When the setting is "12", it will resume the
pre-instantaneous power failure operation
mode after an instantaneous power failure
occurs.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

101
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Selectionofcontrolmethod
80 Motor capacity
0.01/
0.1kW *
9999
0.4 to 55/
0 to 3600kW *
less/75k or more)
9999 V/F control is performed
81
Number of motor
poles
1 9999
12, 14, 16,
18, 20
X18 signal-ON:V/F
control
Set 10 + number of
motor poles.
89
Speed control gain
(magnetic flux
vector)
0.1% 9999
0 to 200%
Motor speed fluctuation due to load
fluctuation is adjusted during advanced
magnetic flux vector control.
100% is a referenced value.
×
9999 Gain matching with the motor set in Pr.71.
451
Second motor
control method
selection
1 9999
10, 11, 12
Select the method of controlling the
second motor. (same as Pr.800)
20, 9999
V/F Control (advanced magnetic flux
vector control)
453
Second motor
capacity
0.01/
0.1kW *
9999
0.4 to 55/
0 to 3600kW *
Set the capacity of the second motor.
less/75k or more)
454
Number of second
motor poles
1 9999
2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Set the number of poles of the second
motor.
569
Second motor
speed control gain
0.1% 9999
0 to 200%
Second motor speed fluctuation due to
load fluctuation is adjusted during
advanced magnetic flux vector control.
100% is a referenced value.
×
9999 Gain matching with the motor set in Pr.450.
800
Control method
selection
1 20
0 Speed control
Vector control
(FR-A7AP)
1 Torque control
2
MC signal-ON:torque
MC signal-OFF:speed
3 Position control
4
MC signal-ON:position
MC signal-OFF:speed
5
MC signal-ON:torque
MC signal-OFF:position
9
Vector control test operation
Test operation of vector control (speed control)
can be performed without connecting a motor.
10 Speed control
Real sensorless
vector control
11 Torque control
12
MC signal-ON :
Torque
MC signal-OFF :
Speed
20
V/F Control (advanced magnetic flux
vector control)
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
MagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector

102
Parameter List
Offlineautotuning
82
Motor excitation
current
0.01/
0.1A *
9999
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
Tuning data
(The value measured by offline auto tuning
is automatically set.)
less/75k or more)
×
9999
Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-
HRCA) constants
83 Motor rated voltage 0.1V
200/
400V *
0 to 1000V
Set the rated motor voltage(V).
* The initial values differ according to the
voltage level. (200V/400V)
84 Rated motor frequency 0.01Hz 60Hz 10 to 120Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
90 Motor constant (R1)
0.001Ω/
0.01mΩ *
9999
0 to 50Ω/
0 to 400mΩ *
Tuning data
less/75k or more)
×
9999
HRCA) constants
91 Motor constant (R2)
0.001Ω/
0.01mΩ *
9999
0 to 50Ω/
0 to 400mΩ *
Tuning data
less/75k or more)
×
9999
HRCA) constants
92 Motor constant (L1)
0.001Ω
(0.1mH)
/0.01mΩ
(0.01mH) *
9999
0 to 50Ω (0 to
1000mH)/
0 to 3600mΩ
(0 to 400mH) *
Tuning data
less/75k or more)
×
9999
HRCA) constants
93 Motor constant (L2)
0.001Ω
(0.1mH)
/0.01mΩ
(0.01mH) *
9999
0 to 50Ω (0 to
1000mH)/
0 to 3600mΩ
(0 to 400mH) *
Tuning data
less/75k or more)
×
9999
HRCA) constants
94 Motor constant (X)
0.01Ω
(0.1%)/
0.01Ω
(0.01%) *
9999
0 to 500Ω
(0 to 100%)/
0 to 100Ω
(0 to 100%) *
Tuning data
less/75k or more)
×
9999
HRCA) constants
96
Auto tuning setting/
status
1 0
0 Auto tuning is not performed
×1 Tuning performed without motor running
101 Tuning performed with motor running
455
Second motor
excitation current
0.01/
0.1A *
9999
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
Tuning data of the second motor
less/75k or more)
×
9999
HRCA) constants
456
Rated second
motor voltage
0.1V
200/
400V *
0 to 1000V
Set the rated voltage (V) of the second
motor.
* The initial values differ according to the
voltage level. (200V/400V)
457
Rated second
motor frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 10 to 120Hz
Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second
motor.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

103
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Offlineautotuning
458
Second motor
constant (R1)
0.001Ω/
0.01mΩ *
9999
0 to 50Ω/
0 to 400mΩ *
less/75k or more)
×
9999 Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA) constants
459
Second motor
constant (R2)
0.001Ω/
0.01mΩ *
9999
0 to 50Ω/
0 to 400mΩ *
less/75k or more)
×
460
Second motor
constant (L1)
0.001Ω
(0.1mH)/
0.01mΩ
(0.01mH) *
9999
0 to 50Ω (0 to
1000mH)/
0 to 3600mΩ
(0 to 400mH) *
less/75k or more)
×
461
Second motor
constant (L2)
0.001Ω
(0.1mH)
/0.01mΩ
(0.01mH) *
9999
0 to 50Ω (0 to
1000mH)/
0 to 3600mΩ
(0 to 400mH) *
less/75k or more)
×
462
Second motor
constant (X)
0.01Ω
(0.1%)/
0.01mΩ
(0.01%) *
9999
0 to 500Ω
(0 to 100%)/
0 to 100Ω
(0 to 100%) *
less/75k or more)
×
463
Second motor auto
tuning setting/status
1 0 0, 1, 101
Set the tuning mode of the second motor.
(same as Pr. 96)
×
684
Tuning data unit
switchover
1 0
0 Internal data converter value
1 Displayed in "A, Ω, mH, %".
859 Torque current
0.01/
0.1A *
9999
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
Tuning data
less/75k or more)
×
860
Second motor
torque current
0.01/
0.1A *
9999
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
less/75k or more)
×
—
89 Refer to Pr. 81.
90 to 94 Refer to Pr. 82 to Pr. 84.
Onlineautotuning
95
Online auto tuning
selection
1 0
0 Online auto tuning is not performed
1 Start-time tuning (at start-up)
2 Magnetic flux observer (normal)
574
Second motor
online auto tuning
1 0 0, 1
Select the second motor online auto
tuning. (same as Pr. 95)
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
MagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorMagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector

104
Parameter List
— 96 Refer to Pr. 82 to Pr. 84.
Adjustable5pointsV/F
100 V/F1(first frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
Set each points (frequency, voltage) of V/F
pattern.
9999: No V/F setting
101
V/F1(first frequency
voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V
102
V/F2(second
frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
103
V/F2(second
frequency voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V
104
V/F3(third
frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
105
V/F3(third
frequency voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V
106
V/F4(fourth
frequency)
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
107
V/F4(fourth
frequency voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V
108 V/F5(fifth frequency) 0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz,
9999
109
V/F5(fifth frequency
voltage)
0.1V 0V 0 to 1000V
71 Refer to page 98.
—
110, 111 Refer to Pr. 7.
112 Refer to Pr. 0.
113 Refer to Pr. 3.
114, 115 Refer to Pr. 22.
116 Refer to Pr. 41.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/F

105
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
PUconnectorcommunication
117
PU communication
station number
1 0 0 to 31
Specify the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
118
PU communication
speed
1 192
48, 96, 192,
384
Set the communication speed.
The setting value × 100 equals the
communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
119
PU communication
stop bit length
1 1
0 Stop bit length: 1bit data length: 8bit
120
PU communication
parity check
1 2
0 Without parity check
1 With odd parity check
2 With even parity check
121
Number of PU
communication
retries
1 1
0 to 10
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error.
If the number of consecutive errors
exceeds the permissible value, the inverter
will come to an alarm stop.
9999
If a communication error occurs, the
inverter will not come to an alarm stop.
122
PU communication
check time interval
0.1s 9999
0 No PU connector communication
0.1 to 999.8s
Set the communication check time interval.
If a no-communication state persists for
longer than the permissible time, the
inverter will come to an alarm stop.
9999
No communication check
(signal loss detection)
123
PU communication
waiting time setting
1 9999
0 to 150ms
Set the waiting time between data
transmission to the inverter and response.
9999 Set with communication data.
124
PU communication
CR/LF selection
1 1
0 Without CR/LF
1 With CR
2 With CR/LF
342
Communication
EEPROM write
selection
1 0
0
Parameter values written by communication
are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1
Parameter values written by
communication are written to the RAM.
551
PU mode operation
command source
selection
1 2
1
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
operation mode control source.
2
Select the PU connector as the PU
3
Select the USB connector as the PU
Changeofanaloginputfrequency,
adjustmentofvoltage,currentinputandfrequency
(calibration)
125
Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
(maximum).
×
126
setting gain frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
(maximum).
(Valid when Pr. 858 = 0 (initial value))
×
241
Analog input display
unit switchover
1 0
0 Displayed in % Select the unit for
analog input display.1 Displayed in V/mA
C2
(902)
setting bias frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 2 input.
×
C3
(902)
setting bias
0.1% 0% 0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the bias side
voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
×
C4
(903)
setting gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%
Set the converted % of the gain side
voltage of terminal 2 input.
×
C5
(904)
setting bias frequency
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz
terminal 4 input.
×
C6
(904)
setting bias
0.1% 20% 0 to 300%
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
×
C7
(905)
setting gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
×
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

106
Parameter List
PIDcontrol
127
PID control
automatic
switchover
frequency
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the control is
automatically changed to PID control.
9999 Without PID automatic switchover function
128 PID action selection 1 10
10 PID reverse action Deviation value
signal (terminal 1)11 PID forward action
20 PID reverse action Measured value
input (terminal 4)
Set value (terminal
2 or Pr. 133)
21 PID forward action
50 PID reverse action Deviation value
signal input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
60 PID reverse action Measured value,
set value input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link
communication)
129
PID proportional
band
0.1% 100%
0.1 to 1000%
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter
setting is small), the manipulated variable
varies greatly with a slight change of the
measured value. Hence, as the proportional
band narrows, the response sensitivity (gain)
improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
hunting occurs.
Gain K = 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
130 PID integral time 0.1s 1s
0.1 to 3600s
Time required for only the integral (I) action to
provide the same manipulated variable as that
for the proportional (P) action. As the integral
time decreases, the set point is reached
earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
131 PID upper limit 0.1% 9999
0 to 100%
Set the upper limit value.
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the
FUP signal is output. The maximum input
(20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value
(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
132 PID lower limit 0.1% 9999
0 to 100%
Set the lower limit value.
If the measured value falls below the setting range,
the FDN signal is output.
The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the
measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
133 PID action set point 0.01% 9999
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999 Terminal 2 input voltage is the set point.
134 PID differential time 0.01s 9999
0.01 to
10.00s
Time required for only the differential (D)
action to provide the same manipulated
variable as that for the proportional (P) action.
As the differential time increases, greater
response is made to a deviation change.
9999 No differential control.
575
Output interruption
detection time
0.1s 1s
0 to 3600s
If the output frequency after PID operation
remains lower than the Pr. 576 setting for
longer than the time set in Pr. 575, the
inverter stops operation.
9999 Without output interruption function
576
Output interruption
detection level
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the output
interruption processing is performed.
577
Output interruption
cancel level
0.1% 1000% 900 to 1100%
Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) to
release the PID output interruption function.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

107
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Switchbetweentheinverteroperationand
electronicbypassoperationtouse
135
Electronic bypass
sequence selection
1 0
0 Without electronic bypass sequence
1 With electronic bypass sequence
136
MC switchover
interlock time
0.1s 1s 0 to 100s
Set the operation interlock time of MC2
and MC3.
137 Start waiting time 0.1s 0.5s 0 to 100s
Set the time slightly longer (0.3 to 0.5s or
so) than the time from when the ON signal
enters MC3 until it actually turns on.
138
Bypass selection at
an alarm
1 0
0
Inverter output is stopped (motor coast) at
inverter fault.
1
Operation is automatically switched to
bypass operation at inverter fault (Not
switched when an external thermal error
occurs)
139
Automatic
switchover
frequency from
inverter to bypass
operation
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 60Hz
Set the frequency to switch inverter
operation to bypass operation.
9999 Without automatic switchover
159
Automatic
switchover
frequency range
from bypass to
inverter operation
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 10Hz
Valid during automatic switchover
operation (Pr. 139 ≠ 9999)
When the frequency command decreases
below (Pr. 139 - Pr. 159) after operation is
switched from inverter operation to bypass
operation, the inverter automatically
switches operation to inverter operation
and operates at the frequency of frequency
command.
When the inverter start command (STF/
STR) is turned off, operation is switched to
inverter operation also.
9999
Valid during automatic switchover
operation (Pr. 139 ≠ 9999)
When the inverter start command (STF/
STR) is turned off after operation is
switched from inverter operation to bypass
operation, operation is switched to inverter
operation and the motor decelerates to
stop.
—
Parameterunit
languageswitchover
145
PU display
language selection
1 0
0 Japanese
× ×
1 English
2 Germany
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Italian
6 Swedish
7 Finnish
— 148,149 Refer to Pr. 22.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

108
Parameter List
Detectionofoutputcurrent(Y12signal)
Detectionofzerocurrent(Y13signal)
150
Output current
detection level
0.1% 150% 0 to 220%
Set the output current detection level.
100% is the rated inverter current.
151
Output current
detection signal
delay time
0.1s 0s 0 to 10s
Set the output current detection period.
Set the time from when the output current
has risen above the setting until the output
current detection signal (Y12) is output.
152
Zero current
detection level
0.1% 5% 0 to 220%
Set the zero current detection level.
Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.
153
Zero current
detection time
0.01s 0.5s 0 to 1s
Set this parameter to define the period
from when the output current drops below
the Pr. 152 value until the zero current
detection signal (Y13) is output.
166
Output current
detection signal
retention time
0.1s 0.1s
0 to 10s
Set the retention time when the Y12 signal
is on.
9999
The Y12 signal on status is retained.
The signal is turned off at the next start.
167
Output current
detection operation
selection
1 0
0
Operation continues when the Y12 signal
is on
1
The inverter is brought to an alarm stop
when the Y12 signal is on. (E.CDO)
— 154 Refer to Pr. 22.
Conditionselectionof
functionvaliditybythesecond
functionselectionsignal
(RT)andthirdfunction(X9)
155
RT signal function
validity condition
selection
1 0
0
Second (third) function is immediately
made valid with on of the RT (X9) signal.
10
Second (third) function is valid only during
the RT (X9) signal is on and constant
speed operation.
(invalid during acceleration/deceleration)
—
156, 157 Refer to Pr. 22 .
158 Refer to Pr. 54 .
159 Refer to Pr. 135 .
Usergroupfunction
160
User group read
selection
1 0
0 All parameters can be displayed.
1
Only the parameters registered in the user
group can be displayed.
9999
Only the simple mode parameters can be
displayed.
172
User group
registered display/
batch clear
1 0
(0 to 16)
Displays the number of cases registered
as a user group (reading only). × ×
9999 Batch clear the user group registration
173
User group
registration
1 9999
0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be
registered to the user group.
Read value is always "9999".
× × ×
174 User group clear 1 9999
0 to 999,
9999
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared
from the user group.
Read value is always "9999".
× × ×
Operationselection
oftheoperationpanel
161
Frequency setting/
key lock operation
selection
1 0
0
Setting dial frequency
setting mode Key lock mode
invalid
×
1
Setting dial
potentiometer mode
10
Setting dial frequency
setting mode Key lock mode
valid
11
Setting dial
potentiometer mode
—
166, 167 Refer to Pr. 150.
168, 169 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
170, 171 Refer to Pr. 52.
172 to 174 Refer to Pr. 160.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

109
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Functionassignmentofinputterminal
178
STF terminal
function selection
1 60
0 to 20,
22 to 28,
42 to 44, 60,
62, 64 to 71,
9999
0: Low-speed operation command
1: Middle-speed operation command
2: High-speed operation command
3: Second function selection
4: Terminal 4 input selection
5: Jog operation selection
6: Selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure, flying start
7: External thermal relay input
8: Fifteen speed selection
9: Third function
10: Inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/
MT-HC, FR-CV connection)
11: FR-HC/MT-HC connection,
instantaneous power failure detection
12: PU operation external interlock
13: External DC injection brake start
14: PID control valid terminal
15: Brake opening completion signal
16: PU-external operation switchover
17: Load pattern selection forward/reverse
rotation boost
18: V/F switch over
19: Load torque high-speed frequency
20: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
switching terminal
22: Orientation command
23: Pre-excitation
24: Output stop
25: Start self-holding selection
26: Control mode changing
27: Torque limit selection
28: Start time tuning
42: Torque bias selection 1*
43: Torque bias selection 2*
44: P/PI control switchover
60: Forward rotation command (assigned to
STF terminal (Pr.178) only)
61: Reverse rotation command (assigned to
STR terminal (Pr. 179) only)
62: Inverter reset
63: PTC thermistor input (assigned to AU
terminal (Pr. 184) only)
64: PID forward/reverse action switchover
65: PU-NET operation switchover
66: External-NET operation switchover
67: Command source switchover
68: Conditional position pulse train sign*
69: Conditional position droop pulse clear*
70: DC feeding operation permission
71: DC feeding cancel
74: Magnetic flux decay output shutoff
9999:No function
* Available only when used with the FR-A7AP.
×
179
STR terminal
function selection
1 61
0 to 20,
22 to 28,
42 to 44, 61,
62, 64 to 71,
9999
×
180
RL terminal function
selection
1 0
0 to 20,
22 to 28,
42 to 44, 62,
64 to 71,
9999
×
181
RM terminal
function selection
1 1 ×
182
RH terminal
function selection
1 2 ×
183
RT terminal function
selection
1 3 ×
184
AU terminal
function selection
1 4
0 to 20,
22 to 28,
42 to 44,
62 to 71,
9999
×
185
JOG terminal
function selection
1 5
0 to 20,
22 to 28,
42 to 44, 62,
64 to 71,
9999
×
186
CS terminal
function selection
1 6 ×
187
MRS terminal
function selection
1 24 ×
188
STOP terminal
function selection
1 25 ×
189
RES terminal
function selection
1 62 ×
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

110
Parameter List
Terminalassignmentofoutputterminal
190
RUN terminal
function selection
1 0 0 to 8,
10 to 20,
25 to 28,
30 to 36, 39,
41 to 47,
64, 70, 84,
85, 90 to 99,
100 to 108,
110 to 116,
120,
125 to 128,
130 to 136,
139,
141 to 147,
164, 170,
190 to 199,
9999
0, 100: Inverter running
1, 101: Up to frequency
2, 102: Instantaneous power failure/
undervoltage
3, 103: Overload alarm
4, 104: Output frequency detection
5, 105: Second output frequency detection
6, 106: Third output frequency detection
7, 107: Regenerative brake pre-alarm
8, 108: Electronic thermal relay function
pre-alarm
10, 110:PU operation mode
11, 111:Inverter operation ready
12, 112:Output current detection
13, 113:Zero current detection
14, 114:PID lower limit
15, 115:PID upper limit
16, 116:PID forward/reverse rotation
output
17, —: Electronic bypass MC1
20, 120:Brake opening request
25, 125:Fan fault output
26, 126:Heatsink overheat pre-alarm
27, 127:Orientation in-position *
28, 128:Orientation error *
30, 130:Forward rotation output *
31, 131:Reverse rotation output *
32, 132:Regenerative status output *
33, 133:Operation ready 2
34, 134:Low speed output
35, 135:Torque detection
36, 136:In-position *
39, 139:Start time tuning completion
41, 141:Speed detection
42, 142:Second speed detection
43, 143:Third speed detection
44, 144:Inverter running 2
45, 145:Inverter running and start command
is on
46, 146:During deceleration at occurrence
of power failure (retained until
release)
47, 147:During PID control activated
64, 164:During retry
70, 170:PID output interruption
84, 184:PreparatDC current feedingion
ready signal *
85, 185:DC current feeding
90, 190:Life alarm
91, 191:Alarm output 3 (power-off signal)
92, 192:Energy saving average value
updated timing
93, 193:Current average monitor signal
94, 194:Alarm output 2
95, 195:Maintenance timer signal
96, 196:Remote output
97, 197:Minor fault output 2
98, 198:Minor fault output
99, 199:Alarm output
9999: No function
0 to 99: Positive logic
100 to 199: Negative logic
* Available only when used with the FR-A7AP.
×
191
SU terminal
function selection
1 1 ×
192
IPF terminal
function selection
1 2 ×
193
OL terminal function
selection
1 3 ×
194
FU terminal function
selection
1 4 ×
195
ABC1 terminal
function selection
1 99
0 to 8,
10 to 20,
25 to 28,
30 to 36, 39,
41 to 47, 64,
70, 84, 85,
90, 91,
94 to 99,
100 to 108,
110 to 116,
120,
125 to 128,
130 to 136,
139,
141 to 147,
164, 170,
190, 191,
194 to 199,
9999
×
196
ABC2 terminal
function selection
1 9999 ×
—
232 to 239 Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6.
242, 243 Refer to Pr. 73.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

111
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Increasecooling
fanlife
244
Cooling fan
operation selection
1 1
0
Operates at power on
Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The
cooling fan is always on at power on)
1
Cooling fan on/off control valid
The fan is normally on during inverter
operation. The fan switches on/off
according to the temperature during a stop
of the inverter whose status is monitored.
Slipcompensation
245 Rated slip 0.01% 9999
0 to 50% Used to set the rated motor slip.
9999 No slip compensation
246
Slip compensation
time constant
0.01s 0.5s 0.01 to 10s
Used to set the response time of slip
compensation. When the value is made
smaller, response will be faster. However,
as load inertia is greater, a regenerative
overvoltage (E.OV ) error is more liable to
occur.
247
Constant-power
range slip
compensation
selection
1 9999
0
Slip compensation is not made in the
constant power range (frequency range
above the frequency set in Pr. 3)
9999
Slip compensation is made in the constant
power range.
Selectionofmotor
stoppingmethod
250 Stop selection 0.1s 9999
0 to 100s
The motor is coasted
to a stop when the
preset time elapses
after the start signal is
turned off.
STF signal:
Forward rotation
start
STR signal:
Reverse rotation
start
1000 to
1100s
The motor is coasted
to a stop (Pr. 250 -
1000)s after the start
signal is turned off.
STF signal: Start
signal
STR signal:
Forward/reverse
signal
9999
When the start signal
is turned off, the
motor decelerates to
stop.
STF signal:
Forward rotation
start
STR signal:
Reverse rotation
start
8888
STF signal: Start
signal
STR signal:
Forward/reverse
signal
Input/outputphase
failureprotection
selection
251
Output phase
failure protection
selection
1 1
0 Without output phase failure protection
1 With output phase failure protection
872
Input phase failure
protection selection
1 0
0 Without input phase failure protection
1 With input phase failure protection
— 252, 253 Refer to Pr. 73.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/F

112
Parameter List
Displayofthelifeoftheinverterparts
255
Life alarm status
display
1 0 (0 to 15)
Display whether the control circuit
capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling
fan, and each parts of the inrush current
limit circuit has reached the life alarm
output level or not. Reading only
× × ×
256
Inrush current limit
circuit life display
1% 100% (0 to 100%)
Display the deterioration degree of the
inrush current limit circuit. Reading only
× × ×
257
Control circuit
capacitor life
display
1% 100% (0 to 100%)
control circuit capacitor. Reading only
× × ×
258
Main circuit
capacitor life
display
1% 100% (0 to 100%)
main circuit capacitor. Reading only
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
× × ×
259
Main circuit
capacitor life
measuring
1 0 0, 1
Setting "1" and turning the power supply off
starts the measurement of the main circuit
capacitor life.
When the Pr.259 value is "3" after powering
on again, the measuring is completed.
Read the deterioration degree in Pr.258.
Operationatinstantaneouspowerfailure
261
Power failure stop
selection
1 0
0
Coasting to stop
When undervoltage or power failure
occurs, the inverter output is shut off.
1 Without UV avoidance When undervoltage
or a power failure
occurs, the inverter
can be decelerated
to a stop.
11 With UV avoidance
2 Without UV avoidance When undervoltage
or a power failure
occurs, the inverter
can be decelerated
to a stop.
If power is restored
during a power
failure, the inverter
accelerates again.
12 With UV avoidance
262
Subtracted
frequency at
deceleration start
0.01Hz 3Hz 0 to 20Hz
Normally operation can be performed with
the initial value unchanged. But adjust the
frequency according to the magnitude of
the load specifications (moment of inertia,
torque).
263
Subtraction starting
frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz
0 to 120Hz
When output frequency ≥ Pr. 263
Decelerate from the speed obtained
from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
When output frequency < Pr. 263
Decelerate from output frequency
9999
Decelerate from the speed obtained from
output frequency minus Pr. 262.
264
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
0.1/
0.01s
5s
0 to 3600/
360s
Set a deceleration slope down to the
frequency set in Pr. 266.
265
Power-failure
deceleration time 2
0.1/
0.01s
9999
0 to 3600/
360s
Set a deceleration slope below the
frequency set in Pr. 266.
9999 Same slope as in Pr. 264
266
Power failure
deceleration time
switchover
frequency
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency at which the
deceleration slope is switched from the Pr.
264 setting to the Pr. 265 setting.
294
UV avoidance
voltage gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
Adjust response level at UV avoidance
operation. A larger setting will improve
responsiveness to the bus voltage change.
—
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

113
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Loadtorquehighspeedfrequencycontrol
270
Stop-on contact/
load torque high-
speed frequency
control selection
1 0
0
Without stop-on contact control and load
torque high-speed frequency control
1 Stop-on contact control
2 Load torque high speed frequency control
3
Stop-on contact + load torque high speed
frequency control
271
High-speed setting
maximum current
0.1% 50% 0 to 220%
Set the upper and lower limits of the
current at high and middle speeds.
272
Middle-speed
setting minimum
current
0.1% 100% 0 to 220%
273
Current averaging
range
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz
Average current during acceleration from
(Pr. 273 × 1/2)Hz to (Pr. 273 )Hz can be
achieved.
9999
Average current during acceleration from
(Pr. 5 × 1/2)Hz to (Pr. 5 )Hz is achieved.
274
Current averaging
filter time constant
1 16 1 to 4000
filter relative to the output current.
(The time constant [ms] is 0.75 × Pr. 274
and the initial value is 12ms.)
A larger setting provides higher stability but
poorer response.
Stop-oncontactcontrol
270
Stop-on contact/
load torque high-
speed frequency
control selection
1 0
0
Without stop-on contact control and load
torque high-speed frequency control
1 Stop-on contact control
2 Load torque high speed frequency control
3
Stop-on contact + load torque high speed
frequency control
275
Stop-on contact
excitation current
low-speed
multiplying factor
0.1% 9999
0 to 1000%
Usually set a value between 130% and
180%.
Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-
contact control.
9999 No compensation.
276
PWM carrier
frequency at stop-
on contact
1 9999
0 to 9/
0 to 4 *
Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-
contact control.
(Valid at the output frequency of 3Hz or
less.)
9999 As set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
MagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxSensorlessSensorlessSensorless

114
Parameter List
Brakesequencefunction
278
Brake opening
frequency
Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor
+ about 1.0Hz.
This parameter may be only set if Pr. 278 ≤
Pr. 282.
279
Brake opening
current
0.1% 130% 0 to 220%
Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to
90%. If the setting is too low, the load is
liable to drop due to gravity at start.
Suppose that the rated inverter current is
100%.
280
Brake opening
current detection
time
0.1s 0.3s 0 to 2s
Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1
to 0.3s.
281
Brake operation
time at start
0.1s 0.3s 0 to 5s
Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time
until the brake is loosened.
until the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to
0.2s.
282
Brake operation
frequency
At this frequency, the brake opening
request signal (BOF) is switched off.
Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278
setting + 3 to 4Hz.
Setting is enabled only when Pr. 282 ≥ Pr.
278.
283
Brake operation
time at stop
0.1s 0.3s 0 to 5s
until the brake is closed + 0.1s.
until the brake is closed + about 0.2 to
0.3s.
284
Deceleration
detection function
selection
1 0
0 Deceleration is not detected.
1
If deceleration is not normal during
deceleration operation, the inverter alarm
(E.MB2) is provided to shut off the output
and turn off the brake opening request
signal (BOF).
285
Overspeed
detection frequency
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 30Hz
When brake sequence function is made
valid under encoder feedback control
If (detected frequency) - (output frequency)
> Pr. 285 under encoder feedback control,
the inverter alarm (E.MB1) is provided to
shut off the output and turn off the brake
opening request signal (BOF).
9999 Overspeed is not detected.
292
Automatic
acceleration/
deceleration
1 0
0, 1, 3, 5 to
8, 11
Brake sequence function is made valid when a setting is "7 or
8".
Speeddeviationexcessdetection
285
Excessive speed
deviation detection
frequency
0.01Hz 9999
9999 Without speed deviation excessive
0 to 30Hz
If the difference (absolute value) between
the speed command value and actual
speed exceeds the Pr. 285 Speed deviation
excess detection frequency setting for longer
than the time set in Pr. 853 Speed deviation
time during speed control under vector
control, speed deviation excessive occurs
and error "E. OSD" appears, resulting in a
stop.
853
Speed deviation
time
0.1s 1s 0 to 100s
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
MagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorVectorVectorVector

115
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Droopcontrol
286 Droop gain 0.1% 0%
0 Droop control is invalid
0.1 to
100%
Set the drooping amount at the rated
torque as a percentage with respect to the
rated frequency.
287
Droop filter time
constant
0.01s 0.3s 0 to 1s
filter applied to the torque current.
288
Droop function
activation selection
1 0
Real sensor less
vector /vector
control
Advanced
magnetic flux
vector control
0, 10
Droop control is not
exercised during
acceleration/
deceleration.
(When Pr.288 = 10,
droop compensation
amount is determined
using the motor
speed as reference.)
Droop control is not
exercised during
acceleration/
deceleration.
Droop
compensation
amount is
determined using
the rated motor
frequency as
reference.
1, 11
Droop control is
always exercised
during operation.
(with 0 limit)
(When Pr.288 = 11,
droop compensation
amount is determined
using the motor
speed as reference.)
2
Droop control is
always exercised
during operation.
(without 0 limit)
PulsetrainI/O
291
Pulse train I/O
selection
1 0
Input Output
×
0 JOG terminal FM output
1 Pulse train input FM output
10 JOG terminal Pulse train open
collector output
(50% duty)11 Pulse train input
20 JOG terminal Pulse train open
collector output
(ON width is always
same)
21
Pulse train input
100
Pulse train open
collector output
(ON width is always
same
(independently of
Pr. 54))
384
Input pulse division
scaling factor
1 0 0 to 250
Indicates division scaling factor to the input
pulse and the frequency resolution to the
input pulse changes according to the
value.
385
Frequency for zero
input pulse
0.01Hz 0 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency when the input pulse is 0
(bias).
386
Frequency for
maximum input
pulse
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
Set the frequency when the input pulse is
maximum (gain).
— 292, 293 Refer to Pr. 61.
— 294 Refer to Pr. 261.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

116
Parameter List
RS-485communication
331
RS-485
communication
station number
1 0
0 to 31
(0 to 247)
Set the inverter station number.
(same specifications as Pr. 117 ) When "1"
(Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 551, the
setting range within parenthesis is applied.
332
RS-485
communication speed
1 96
3, 6, 12,
24, 48, 96,
192, 384
Used to select the communication speed.
333
RS-485 communication
stop bit length
1 1 0, 1, 10, 11
Select stop bit length and data length. (same
specifications as Pr. 119)
334
parity check selection
1 2 0, 1, 2
Select the parity check specifications. (same
335
retry count
1 1
0 to 10,
9999
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error. (same
336
RS-485
communication
check time interval
0.1s 0s
0
RS-485 communication can be made, but the
inverter will come to an alarm stop in the NET
operation mode.
0.1 to
999.8s
9999
No communication check
(signal loss detection)
337
waiting time setting
1 9999
0 to 150ms,
9999
Set the waiting time between data transmission
to the inverter and response.
338
Communication operation
command source
1 0
0 Operation command source communication
1 Operation command source external
339
Communication
speed command
source
1 0
0 Speed command source communication
1
Speed command source external (Frequency
setting from communication is invalid,
terminal 2 and 1 setting from external is valid)
2
Speed command source external (Frequency
setting from communication is valid, terminal
2 and 1 setting from external is invalid)
341
CR/LF selection
1 1 0, 1, 2
Select presence/absence of CR/LF. (same
342
Communication
EEPROM write
selection
1 0
0
are written to the EEPROM and RAM.
1
are written to the RAM.
343
Communication
error count
1 0 —
Display the number of communication errors
during Modbus-RTU communication.
Read only.
Displayed only when Modbus-RTU protocol is
selected.
× × ×
539
Modbus-RTU
communication
check time interval
0.1s 9999
0
Modbus-RTU communication can be made,
but the inverter will come to an alarm stop in
the NET operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s
9999
No communication check (signal loss
detection)
549 Protocol selection 1 0
0
Mitsubishi inverter
(computer link)
protocol
After setting change,
reset (switch power
off, then on) the
inverter.
The setting change
is reflected after a
reset.
1 Modbus-RTU protocol
550
NET mode
operation command
source selection
1 9999
0 Communication option valid
1 Inverter RS-485 terminal valid
9999
Automatic recognition of the communication
option
Normally, the RS-485 terminals are valid.
Communication option is valid when the
communication option is mounted.
551
PU mode operation
command source
selection
1 2
1
Select the RS-485 terminals as the PU
2
Select the PU connector as the PU operation
mode control source.
3
Select the USB connector as the PU
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

117
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
—
341 to 343 Refer to Pr. 117.
Orientationcontrol
350
Stop position
command selection
1 9999
0 Internal stop position command (Pr.356)
1
External stop position command (FR-A7AX
16-bit data)
9999 Orientation control invalid
351 Orientation speed 0.01Hz 2Hz 0 to 30Hz
Decrease the motor speed to the set value
when the orientation command (X22) is given.
352 Creep speed 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 0 to 10Hz As soon as the current position pulse
reaches the creep switchover position set
in Pr.353 after the speed has reached the
orientation speed, the speed decelerates
down to the creep speed set in Pr.352.
353
Creep switchover
position
1 511 0 to 16383
354
Position loop
switchover position
1 96 0 to 8191
As soon as the current position pulse
reaches the set position loop switchover
position, control is changed to position loop.
355
DC injection brake
start position
1 5 0 to 255
After changed to position loop, DC injection
brake is applied and the motor stops as
soon as the current position pulse reaches
the set DC injection brake start position.
356
Internal stop
position command
1 0 0 to 16383
When "0" is set in Pr. 350, the internal
position command is activated and the
setting value of Pr. 356 becomes a stop
position.
357
Orientation in-
position zone
1 5 0 to 255
Set the in-position zone at a stop of the
orientation.
358
Servo torque
selection
1 1 0 to 13
Functions at orientation completion can be
selected.
359
Encoder rotation
direction
1 1
0
1
360 16 bit data selection 1 0
0 Speed command When 1 is set in
Pr.350 and the
option FR-A7AX is
mounted, set a stop
position using 16-
bit data.
Stop position
command is input
as binary
regardless of the
Pr.304 setting.
1
Position command
16 bit data is used as
external position
command as is.
2 to 127
Set the stop position
dividing up to 128
stop positions at
regular intervals.
361 Position shift 1 0 0 to 16383
Shift the origin using a compensation value
without changing the origin of the encoder.
The stop position is a position obtained by
adding the setting value of Pr. 361 to the
position command.
362
Orientation position
loop gain
0.1 1 0.1 to 10
When servo torque function is selected
using Pr.358, output frequency for
generating servo torque increases to the
creep speed of Pr.352 gradually according
to the slope set in Pr.362. Although the
operation becomes faster when the value
is increased, a machine may hunt, etc.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/FMagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxVectorVectorVector
A
Encoder
CW
A
Encoder
CW

118
Parameter List
Orientationcontrol
363
Completion signal
output delay time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 5s
The orientation complete signal (ORA) is
output delaying the set time after in-
position zone is entered. Also, the signal
turns off delaying the set time after in-
position zone is out.
364
Encoder stop check
time
0.1s 0.5s 0 to 5s
Orientation fault signal (ORM) is output
when the encoder remains stopped for the
set time without orientation completion in
the state where no orientation complete
signal (ORA) is output. ORM signal is
output when orientation is not completed
again in the set time in the state where
ORA signal is output.
365 Orientation limit 1s 9999
0 to 60s
Measure the time taken after passing the
creep switchover position and output the
orientation fault signal (ORM) if orientation
is not completed within the set time.
9999 Set to 120s.
366 Recheck time 0.1s 9999
0 to 5s
Turning off the start signal with orientation
command (X22) on after stopping the motor
by orientation control, the present position
is checked again after the set time elapses
and the orientation complete signal (ORA)
or orientation fault signal (ORM) is output.
9999 Not checked.
369
Number of encoder
pulses
1 1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of pulses before multiplied
by four.
393
Orientation
selection
1 0
0
Orientation is executed from the current
rotation direction.
1
Orientation is executed from the forward
rotation direction.
2
Orientation is executed from the reverse
rotation direction.
396
Orientation speed
gain (P term)
1 60 0 to 1000 Servo rigidity is (response level during
position control loop) at orientation stop
can be adjusted.397
Orientation speed
integral time
0.001s 0.333s 0 to 20.0s
398
Orientation speed
gain (D term)
0.1% 1% 0 to 100.0%
Lag/advance compensation gain can be
adjusted.
399
Orientation
deceleration ratio
1 20 0 to 1000
Make adjustment when the motor runs
back at orientation stop or the orientation
time is long.
Encoderfeedbackcontrol
359
Encoder rotation
direction
1 1
0
1
367
Speed feedback
range
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 400Hz Set the range of speed feedback control.
9999 Encoder feedback control is invalid
368 Feedback gain 0.1 1 0 to 100
Set when the rotation is unstable or
response is slow.
369
Number of encoder
pulses
1 1024 0 to 4096
Set the number of pulses before multiplied
by four.
Overspeed
detection
374
Overspeed
detection level
0.01Hz 140Hz 0 to 400Hz
When the motor speed reaches or exceeds
the speed set in Pr.374 during encoder
feedback control, real sensorless vector
control, or vector control, over speed
(E.OS) occurs and stops the inverter output.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/FMagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxVectorVectorVectorV/FV/FV/FMagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticflux
A
Encoder
CW
A
Encoder
CW

119
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Encodersignalcablebreakagedetection
376
Encoder signal loss
detection enable/
disable selection
1 0
0 Signal loss detection is invalid
1
Signal loss detection is valid
When the cable of the encoder signal is
broken during encoder feedback control,
orientation control, or vector control, signal
loss detection (E.ECT) is activated to stop the
inverter output.
—
384 to 386 Refer to Pr. 291.
Positioncontrol
419
Position command
source selection
1 0
0
Conditional position control function by
contact input
2
Conditional position pulse train command by
pulse train input from the JOG terminal
420
Command pulse scaling
factor numerator
1 1 0 to 32767 Set the electronic gear.
Pr. 420 is a numerator and Pr. 421 is a
denominator.421
Command pulse scaling
factor denominator
1 1 0 to 32767
422 Position loop gain 1s-1 25s-1 0 to 150s-1 Set the gain of the position loop.
423
Position feed
forward gain
1% 0% 0 to 100%
Function to cancel a delay caused by the
droop pulses of the deviation counter.
424
Position command
acceleration/deceleration
time constant
0.001s 0s 0 to 50s
Used when rotation has become unsmooth at
a large electronic gear ratio (about 10 times or
more) and low speed.
425
Position feed forward
command filter
0.001s 0s 0 to 5s
Enters the primary delay filter in response to
the feed forward command.
426 In-position width 1 pulse
100
pulse
0 to 32767
pulse
The in-position signal (Y36) turns on when the
droop pulses become less than the setting.
427
Excessive level
error
1 40K
0 to 400K
A position error excessive (E.OD) occurs when
the droop pulses exceed the setting.
9999 Function invalid
428
Command pulse
selection
1 0
0 to 2 Pulse train + sign Negative logic
3 to 5 Pulse train + sign Positive logic
429
Clear signal
selection
1 1
0
Deviation counter is cleared at trailing edge
(at the moment when H level is changed to L
level)
1 eviation counter is cleared at L level
430
Pulse monitor
selection
1 9999
Description
FR-DU07(FR-PU04/
FR-PU07)
display
0 The cumulative
command pulse value
is displayed.
Lower 4(5) digits
1 Upper 4(5) digits
2 The cumulative
feedback pulse value is
displayed.
Lower 4(5) digits
3 Upper 4(5) digits
4 The droop pulses are
monitored.
Lower 4(5) digits
5 Upper 4(5) digits
9999 Frequency monitor is displayed.
464
Digital position
control sudden stop
deceleration time
0.1s 0 0 to 360.0s
Set the time until the inverter stops when the
forward rotation (reverse rotation) command
is turned off with the position feed forward
function.
—
453, 454 Refer to Pr. 80.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
V/FV/FV/FMagneticfluxMagneticfluxMagneticfluxVectorVectorVectorVectorVectorVector

120
Parameter List
Conditionalpositionfeedfunction
Selection Method
Position Feed
Speed
465
First position feed
amount lower 4 digits
1 0 0 to 9999
RH
High speed
(Pr.4)
466
First position feed
amount upper 4 digits
1 0 0 to 9999
467
Second position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
RM
Middle speed
(Pr.5)
468
Second position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
469
Third position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
RL
Low speed
(Pr.6)
470
Third position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
471
Fourth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
RM, RL Speed 4 (Pr.24)
472
Fourth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
473
Fifth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
RH, RL Speed 5 (Pr.25)
474
Fifth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
475
Sixth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
RH, RM Speed 6 (Pr.26)
476
Sixth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
477
Seventhposition feed
1 0 0 to 9999
RH, RM, RL Speed 7 (Pr.27)
478
Seventhposition feed
1 0 0 to 9999
479
Eighth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX Speed 8 (Pr.232)
480
Eighth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
481
Ninth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RL Speed 9 (Pr.233)
482
Ninth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
483
Tenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RM Speed 10 (Pr.234)
484
Tenth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
485
Eleventhpositionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RM, RL Speed 11 (Pr.235)
486
Eleventhpositionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
487
Twelfth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RH Speed 12 (Pr.236)
488
Twelfth position feed
1 0 0 to 9999
489
Thirteenthpositionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RH, RL Speed 13 (Pr.237)
490
Thirteenthpositionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
491
Fourteenthpositionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RH, RM Speed 14 (Pr.238)
492
Fourteenthpositionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
493
Fifteenth positionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
REX, RH, RM, RL Speed 15 (Pr.239)
494
Fifteenth positionfeed
1 0 0 to 9999
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
VectorVectorVector

121
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Remoteoutput
function
(REMsignal)
495
Remote output
selection
1 0
0
Remote output data
clear at powering off
No remote output
data held at
resetting1
Remote output data
held at powering off
10
Remote output data
clear at powering off
Remote output
data held at
resetting11
Remote output data
held at powering off
496 Remote output data 1 1 0 0 to 4095 Output terminal can be switched on and
off.
× × ×
497 Remote output data 2 1 0 0 to 4095 × × ×
Maintenanceofparts
503 Maintenance timer 1 0 0 (1 to 9998)
Display the cumulative energization time of
the inverter in 100h increments.
Reading only
Writing the setting of "0" clears the
cumulative energization time.
× × ×
504
Maintenance timer
alarm output set time
1 9999
0 to 9998
Set the time taken until when the
maintenance timer alarm output signal
(Y95) is output.
×
9999 No function
— 516 to 519 Refer to Pr. 29.
Invertersetupusing
USBcommunication
547
USB communication
station number
1 0 0 to 31 Specify the inverter station number.
548
USB communication
check time interval
0.1s 9999
0
USB communication is enabled. However,
the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.
USB) if operation is changed to PU
operation mode.
0.1 to 999.8s Set the interval of communication check time.
9999 No communication check
—
550, 551 Refer to Pr. 338 and Pr. 339.
Currentaveragevalue
monitorsignal
555
Current average
time
0.1s 1s 0.1 to 1.0s
Set the time taken to average the current
during start bit output (1s).
556
Data output mask
time
0.1s 0s 0.0 to 20.0s
Set the time for not obtaining (mask)
transient state data.
557
Current average
value monitor signal
output reference
current
0.01/
0.1A *
Rated
inverter
current
0 to 500/
0 to 3600A *
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the
signal of the current average value.
less/75k or more)
563, 564 Refer to Pr. 52.
—
575 to 577 Refer to Pr. 127.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

122
Parameter List
Torquecommandsourceselection
804
Torque command
source selection
1 0
0
Torque command by terminal 1 analog
input
1
Torque command by parameter
Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting (-400% to 400%)
3
Torque command by using CC-Link (FR-
A7NC)
4 Digital input from the option (FR-A7AX)
5 Torque command by using CC-Link (FR-
A7NC)6
805
Torque command
value (RAM)
1% 1000%
600 to
1400%
Digital setting of the torque command can
be made by setting Pr. 805 or Pr. 806.
(Setting from communication option, etc.
can be made.)
In this case, set the speed limit value to an
appropriate value to prevent overspeed.
×
806
Torque command
value
(RAM,EEPROM)
1% 1000%
600 to
1400%
Speedlimit
807
Speed limit
selection
1 0
0
Use the speed command value during
speed control as speed limit.
1
According to Pr. 808 and Pr. 809, set the
speed limit in forward and reverse rotation
directions individually.
2
The analog voltage of the terminal 1 input
is used to make speed limit. For 0 to 10V
input, set the forward rotation speed limit.
(The reverse rotation speed limit is Pr. 1
Maximum frequency)
For -10 to 0V input, set the reverse rotation
speed limit. (The forward rotation speed
limit is Pr. 1 Maximum frequency.) The
maximum frequency of both the forward
and reverse rotations is Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency.
808
Forward rotation
speed limit
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 120Hz
Set the speed limit level during forward
rotation. (valid when Pr. 807 = 1)
809
Reverse rotation
speed limit
0.01Hz 9999
0 to 120Hz
Set the speed limit level during reverse
rotation. (valid when Pr. 807 = 1)
9999
The setting is the same as that of the
torque limit in the forward rotation
direction.
— 811 Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 37.
— 812 to 817 Refer to Pr. 22.
Easygain
tuningselection
818
Easy gain tuning
response level
setting
1 2 1 to 15
1 : Slow response
↓
15 : Fast response
819 Easy gain tuning
selection
1 0
0 No tuning
×1
With load estimation
(only under vector
control)
The optimum gain
is automatically set
from the torque
command and
speed during motor
operation.
2
Manual input of load
(Pr. 880)
Speedloopproportional
gainsetting
820
Speed control P
gain 1
1% 60% 0 to 1000%
Set the proportional gain for speed control.
(Increasing the value improves trackability
in response to a speed command change
and reduces speed variation with
disturbance.)
830
Speed control P
gain 2
1% 9999
0 to 1000%
Second function of Pr. 820 (valid when RT
signal is on)
9999 No function
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
SensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector

123
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Speedcontrol
integraltimesetting
821
Speed control
integral time 1
0.001s 0.333s 0 to 20s
Set the integral time during speed control.
(Decrease the value to shorten the time
taken for returning to the original speed if
speed variation with disturbance occurs.)
831
Speed control
integral time 2
0.001s 9999
0 to 20s
RT terminal is on)
9999 No function
Speeddetection
filterfunction
823
Speed detection
filter 1
0.001s 0.001s 0 to 0.1s
Set the primary delay filter for the speed
feedback.
833
Speed detection
filter 2
0.001s 9999
0 to 0.1s
Second function of Pr. 823 (valid when RT
signal is on)
9999 No function
Currentloop
proportionalgainsetting
824
Torque control P
gain 1
1% 100% 0 to 200%
Set the proportional gain for the current
control of the q and d axes. (Increasing the
value improves trackability in response to a
current command change and reduces
current variation with disturbance.)
834
Torque control P
gain 2
1% 9999
0 to 200%
RT terminal is on)
9999 No function
Currentcontrol
integraltimesetting
825
Torque control
integral time 1
0.1ms 5ms 0 to 500ms
Set the integral time for the current control
of the q and d axes. (Decreasing the value
shortens the time taken to return to the
original torque if current variation with
disturbance occurs.)
835
Torque control
integral time 2
0.1ms 9999
0 to 500ms
RT signal is on)
9999 No function
Torquedetection
filterfunction
827
Torque detection
filter 1
0.001s 0s 0 to 0.1s
Set the primary delay filter for the current
feedback.
837
Torque detection
filter 2
0.001s 9999
0 to 0.1s
RT signal is on)
9999 No function
Speedfeedforwardcontrol,
modeladaptivespeedcontrol
828
Model speed
control gain
1% 60% 0 to 1000% Set the gain for model speed controller.
877
Speed feed forward
control/model
adaptive speed
control selection
1 0
0 Normal speed control is exercised
1 Speed feed forward control is exercised.
2 Model adaptive speed control is enabled.
878
Speed feed forward
filter
0.01s 0s 0 to 1s
Set the primary delay filter for the speed
feed forward result calculated using the
speed command and load inertia ratio.
879
Speed feed forward
torque limit
0.1% 150% 0 to 400%
Limits the maximum value of the speed
feed forward torque.
880 Load inertia ratio 0.1 7
0 to 200
times
Set the load inertia ratio.
Inertia ratio found by easy gain turning.
×
881
Speed feed forward
gain
1% 0% 0 to 1000%
Set the feed forward calculation result as a
gain.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
SensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector

124
Parameter List
—
Torquebiasfunction
840
Torque bias
selection
1 9999
0
Set the contact signal (X42, X43) based-
torque bias amount using Pr.841 to Pr.843.
1
Set the terminal 1-based torque bias amount
as desired in C16 to C19. (forward rotation)
2
Set the terminal 1-based torque bias amount
as desired in C16 to C19. (reverse rotation)
3
The terminal 1-based torque bias amount
can be set automatically in C16 to C19,
Pr.846 according to the load.
9999 Without torque bias, rated torque 100%
841 Torque bias 1
1% 9999
600 to
999%
Negative torque bias amount (-400% to -
1%)
842 Torque bias 2
1000 to
1400%
Positive torque bias amount (0% to 400%)
843 Torque bias 3 9999 Without torque bias setting
844 Torque bias filter 0.001s 9999
0 to 5s Time until torque rises.
9999 Same operation as when 0s is set.
845
Torque bias
operation time
0.01s 9999
0 to 5s
Time for maintaining torque equivalent to
the torque bias amount.
9999 Same operation as when 0s is set.
846
Torque bias balance
compensation
0.1V 9999
0 to 10V Set the voltage under balanced load.
9999 Same operation as when 0V is set.
847
Fall-time torque
bias terminal 1 bias
1% 9999
0 to 400% Set the bias value of the torque command.
9999 Same as at a rise time (C16, C17).
848
Fall-time torque
bias terminal 1 gain
1% 9999
0 to 400% Set the gain value of the torque command.
9999 Same as at a rise time (C18, C19).
—
Excitationratio
854 Excitation ratio 1% 100% 0 to 100% Set the excitation ratio under no load.
Functionassignmentof
analoginputterminal
858
Terminal 4 function
assignment
1 0
0 Frequency/speed command
×1 Magnetic flux command
4 Stall prevention/torque limit
9999 No function
868
Terminal 1 function
assignment
1 0
0 Frequency setting auxiliary
×
1 Magnetic flux command
2 Regenerative torque limit
3 Torque command
4
Stall prevention/torque limit/torque
command
5 Forward/reverse rotation speed limit
6 Torque bias
9999 No function
— 859 to 860 Refer to Pr. 82.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
VectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector

125
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Notchfilter
862
Notch filter time
constant
1 0 0 to 60
You can use the machine resonance
speed to make this setting to reduce the
response level of the machine resonance
frequency band, avoiding machine
resonance.
863 Notch filter depth 1 0
0 Deep (-40dB)
1 ↑ (-14dB)
2 ↓ (-8dB)
3 Sharrow (-4dB)
Torquedetection
864 Torque detection 0.1% 150% 0 to 400%
You can make setting to output a signal if
the motor torque exceeds the
predetermined value.
—
— 872 Refer to Pr. 251.
Speedlimitduring
speedcontrol
873 Speed limit 0.01Hz 20Hz 0 to 120Hz
Frequency is limited at the set frequency +
Pr.873 during vector control.
Faultdefinition
875 Fault definition 1 0
0
At occurrence of any alarm, output is shut
off immediately. At this time, the alarm
output also turns on.
1
At occurrence of external thermal operation
(OHT), electronic thermal relay function
(THM) or PTC thermistor function (PTC)
alarm, the motor is decelerated to a stop
and output is shut off.
At occurrence of an alarm other than OHT,
THM and PTC, output is shut off
immediately. Same operation as when "0" is
set is performed under position control.
— 877 to 881 Refer to Pr. 828.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
SensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVectorSensorlessSensorlessSensorlessVectorVectorVector
VectorVectorVector

126
Parameter List
Regenerationavoidancefunction
882
Regeneration
avoidance
operation selection
1 0
0 Regeneration avoidance function invalid
1
Regeneration avoidance function is always
valid
2
Regeneration avoidance function is valid
only at constant speed
883
Regeneration
avoidance operation
level
0.1V
380 /
760VDC
*
300 to 800V
Set the bus voltage level at which
regeneration avoidance operates. When
the bus voltage level is set to low,
overvoltage error will be less apt to occur.
However, the actual deceleration time
increases.
The set value must be higher than the
power supply voltage ×
voltage level. (200V class / 400V class)
884
Regeneration
avoidance at
deceleration
detection sensitivity
1 0
0
Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage
change ratio is invalid
1 to 5
Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage
change.
Setting: 1 → 5
Detection sensitivity:Low → High
885
Regeneration
avoidance
compensation
frequency limit value
0.01Hz 6Hz
0 to 10Hz
Set the limit value of frequency which rises
at activation of regeneration avoidance
function.
9999 Frequency limit invalid
886
Regeneration
avoidance voltage
gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
Adjust responsiveness at activation of
regeneration avoidance. Setting a larger
value in Pr.886 will improve responsiveness
to the bus voltage change. However, the
output frequency could become unstable.
When vibration is not suppressed by
decreasing the Pr.886 setting, set a smaller
value in Pr.665.
665
Regeneration
avoidance
frequency gain
0.1% 100% 0 to 200%
Free
parameter
888 Free parameter 1 1 9999 0 to 9999 Parameters you can use for your own
purposes.
Used for maintenance, management, etc.
by setting a unique number to each
inverter when multiple inverters are used.
Data is held even if the inverter power is
turned off.
× ×
889 Free parameter 2 1 9999 0 to 9999 × ×
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled
2

127
Parameter List
ParameterList
3
DRIVETHEMOTOR
Energysavingmonitor
892 Load factor 0.1% 100% 30 to 150%
Set the load factor for commercial power-
supply operation.
This value is used to calculate the power
consumption estimated value during
commercial power supply operation.
893
Energy saving
monitor reference
(motor capacity)
0.01/
0.1kW *
Inverter
rated
capacity
0.1 to 55/
0 to 3600kW *
Set the motor capacity (pump capacity).
Set when calculating power saving rate
and average power saving rate value.
less/75k or more)
894
Control selection
during commercial
power-supply
operation
1 0
0 Discharge damper control (fan)
1 Inlet damper control (fan)
2 Valve control (pump)
3
Commercial power-supply drive (fixed
value)
895
Power saving rate
reference value
1 9999
0
Consider the value during commercial
power-supply operation as 100%
1 Consider the Pr. 893 setting as 100%.
9999 No function
896 Power unit cost 0.01 9999
0 to 500
Set the power unit cost. Display the power
saving rate on the energy saving monitor
9999 No function
897
Power saving
monitor average
time
1 9999
0 Average for 30 minutes
1 to 1000h Average for the set time
9999 No function
898
Power saving
cumulative monitor
clear
1 9999
0 Cumulative monitor value clear
×
1 Cumulative monitor value hold
10
Cumulative monitor continue
(communication data upper limit 9999)
9999
Cumulative monitor continue
(communication data upper limit 65535)
899
Operation time rate
(estimated value)
0.1% 9999
0 to 100%
Use for calculation of annual power saving
amount. Set the annual operation ratio
(consider 365 days × 24hr as 100%).
9999 No function
Adjustmentof
terminalFM
andAM
(calibration)
C0
(900)
FM terminal
calibration
--- --- ---
Calibrate the scale of the meter connected
to terminal FM. (Only when Pr. 291 = 0, 1)
×
C1
(901)
AM terminal
calibration
--- --- ---
Calibrate the scale of the analog meter
connected to terminal AM.
×
—
C2(902)
to
C7(905)
Refer to Pr. 125 and Pr. 126.
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

128
Parameter List
Adjustmentofanaloginput
speedlimit
(calibration)
C12
(917)
Terminal 1 bias
frequency (speed)
0.01Hz 0Hz 0 to 400Hz
terminal 1 input. (valid when Pr.868 = 5)
×
C13
(917)
Terminal 1 bias
(speed)
0.1% 0% 0 to 300%
voltage (current) of terminal 1 input. (valid
when Pr.868 = 5)
×
C14
(918)
Terminal 1 gain
frequency (speed)
0.01Hz 60Hz 0 to 400Hz
(maximum). (valid when Pr.868 = 5)
×
C15
(918)
Terminal 1 gain
(speed)
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%
when Pr.868 = 5)
×
Adjustmentofanaloginputtorquemagneticfluxcommand
(calibration)
C16
(919)
Terminal 1 bias
command (torque/
magnetic flux)
0.1% 0% 0 to 400%
Set the torque/magnetic flux command
value on the bias side of terminal 1 input.
(valid when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
×
C17
(919)
Terminal 1 bias
(torque/magnetic
flux)
0.1% 0% 0 to 300%
when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
×
C18
(920)
Terminal 1 gain
command (torque/
magnetic flux)
0.1% 150% 0 to 400%
value on the gain side of terminal 1 input.
(valid when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
×
C19
(920)
Terminal 1 gain
(torque/magnetic
flux)
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%
when Pr. 868 ≠ 0, 5)
×
C38
(932)
Terminal 4 bias
command (torque/
magnetic flux)
0.1% 0% 0 to 400%
(valid when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
×
C39
(932)
Terminal 4 bias
(torque/magnetic
flux)
0.1% 20% 0 to 300%
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. (valid
when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
×
C40
(933)
Terminal 4 gain
command (torque/
magnetic flux)
0.1% 150% 0 to 400%
(valid when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
×
C41
(933)
Terminal 4 gain
(torque/magnetic
flux)
0.1% 100% 0 to 300%
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input. (valid
when Pr. 858 = 1, 4)
×
— 989
Parameter copy
alarm release
1 10/100 * 10, 100
Parameters for alarm release at parameter
copy
×
Buzzercontrol
oftheoperation
panel
990 PU buzzer control 1 1
0 Without buzzer
1 With buzzer
PUcontrast
adjustment
991
PU contrast
adjustment
1 58 0 to 63
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can
be performed.
0 (Light) → 63 (Dark)
×
Parameterclear,
parametercopy
Pr.CL Parameter clear 1 0 0, 1
Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration
parameters to the initial values.
ALLC All parameter clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.
Er.CL Alarm history clear 1 0 0, 1 Setting "1" will clear eight past alarms.
PCPY Parameter copy 1 0
0 Cancel
1 Read the source parameters to the operation panel.
2
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel to the
destination inverter.
3 Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Function
Parameter
Name
Incre
ments
Initial
Value
Range Description
Para
meter
copy
Param
eter
clear
All
param
eter
clear
Related
parameters
: enabled
× : disabled

129
Reset method of protective function
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 TROUBLESHOOTING
When an alarm (major failures) occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the inverter to an
alarm stop and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following error (alarm) indications.
If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other problem, please contact your
sales representative.
• Retention of alarm output signal......... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is
opened at the activation of the protective function, the inverter's control power
will be lost and the alarm output will not be held.
• Alarm display ...................................... When the protective function is activated, the operation panel display
automatically switches to the above indication.
• Resetting method................................ When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is kept stopped.
Unless reset, therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 129.)
• When the protective function is activated, take the corresponding corrective action, then reset the inverter, and
resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter alarm displays are roughly divided as below.
(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-
PU04 /FR-PU07) is displayed.
The inverter does not shut off output.
(2) Warnings
The inverter does not shut off output even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate
measures will lead to a major fault.
(3) Minor fault
The inverter does not shut off output.You can also output a minor fault signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Major fault
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
4.1 Reset method of protective function
(1) Resetting the inverter
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value
of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Operation 1: .....Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter.
(Enabled only when the inverter protective function is activated (major
fault) (Refer to page 135 for major fault.))
Operation 2: ......Switch power off once, then switch it on again.
Operation 3: . ....Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is
kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a reset
status.)
ON
OFF
Inverter
RES
SD

130
List of alarm display
4.2 List of alarm display
* If an error occurs when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on
the FR-PU04.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Refer
to
Errormessage
E - - - Alarm history 145
HOLD Operation panel lock 131
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error 131
rE1 to 4 Copy operation error 132
Err. Error 132
Warnings
OL Stall prevention (overcurrent) 133
oL Stall prevention (overvoltage) 133
RB Regenerative brake prealarm 134
TH
Electronic thermal relay
function prealarm
134
PS PU stop 133
MT Maintenance signal output 134
CP Parameter copy 134
SL
Speed limit indication
(Output during speed limit)
134
Minorfault
FN Fan fault 134
Majorfault
E.OC1
Overcurrent shut-off during
acceleration
135
E.OC2
constant speed
135
E.OC3
deceleration or stop
135
E.OV1
Regenerative overvoltage
shut-off during acceleration
136
E.OV2
Regenerative overvoltage
shut-off during constant speed
136
E.OV3
Regenerative overvoltage shut-
off during deceleration or stop
136
E.THT
Inverter overload shut-off
(electronic thermal relay function)
136
E.THM
Motor overload shut-off
(electronic thermal relay function)
136
E.FIN Fin overheat 137
E.IPF Instantaneous power failure 137
E.BE
Brake transistor alarm
detection
137
E.UVT Undervoltage 137
E.ILF* Input phase failure 137
E.OLT Stall prevention 138
to
to
Majorfault
E.GF
Output side earth (ground)
fault overcurrent
138
E.LF Output phase failure 138
E.OHT
External thermal relay
operation *2
138
E.PTC* PTC thermistor operation 138
E.OPT Option alarm 139
E.OP3 Communication option alarm 139
E. 1 to
E. 3
Option alarm 139
E.PE
Parameter storage device
alarm
139
E.PUE PU disconnection 140
E.RET Retry count excess 140
E.PE2*
Parameter storage device
alarm
140
/
/
E. 6 /
E. 7 /
E.CPU
CPU error 140
E.CTE
Operation panel power
supply short circuit, RS-485
terminal power supply short
circuit
140
E.P24
24VDC power output short
circuit
142
E.CDO*
Output current detection
value exceeded
142
E.IOH*
Inrush current limit circuit
alarm
142
E.SER*
Communication error
(inverter)
142
E.AIE* Analog input error 142
E.OS Overspeed occurence 141
E.OSD
Speed deviation excess
detection
141
E.ECT Signal loss detection 141
E.OD Excessive position error 141
E.MB1
to
E.MB7
Brake sequence error 140
E.EP Encoder phase error 141
E.USB* USB communication error 142
E.11
Opposite rotation
deceleration error
143
E.13 Internal circuit error 143
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Refer
to
to
to

131
Causes and corrective actions
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.3 Causes and corrective actions
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
HOLD
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than is made invalid. (Refer to page 41.)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2s to release lock.
Operation Panel
Indication
Er1
Name Write disable error
Description
1. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to
disable parameter write.
2. Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
3. Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped
4. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication
Check point
1. Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
2. Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
3. Check the settings of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction
Manual (applied).)
4. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
Operation Panel
Indication
Er2
Name Write error during operation
Description
When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled
independently of operation status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is on.
Check point
1. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
2. Check that the inverter is not operating.
Corrective action
1. Set "2" in Pr. 77.
2. After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
Operation Panel
Indication
Er3
Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check point
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
Operation Panel
Indication
Er4
Name Mode designation error
Description You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
Check point
1. Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".
2. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action
1. After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page
53.)
2. After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.

132
Operation Panel
Indication
rE1
Name Parameter read error
Description An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading.
Check point --------------
Corrective action
· Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 45.)
· Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
rE2
Name Parameter write error
Description
1. You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation.
2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Check point Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
Corrective action
1. After stopping operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 45.)
2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
rE3
Name Parameter verification error
Description
1. Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different.
2. An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check point Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
Corrective action
1. Press to continue verification.
Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 46.)
2. Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
rE4
Name Model error
Description
1. A different model was used for parameter write and verification during parameter copy.
2. When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped
Check point
1. Check that the verified inverter is the same model.
2. Check that the power is not turned off or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
Corrective action
1. Use the same model (FR-A700 series) for parameter copy and verification.
2. Perform parameter copy read again.
Operation Panel
Indication
Err.
Description
1. The RES signal is on
2. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector)
3. When the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to a separate power, it may appear at turning on of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
Corrective action
1. Turn off the RES signal.
2. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.

133
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) Warnings
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
OL
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OL
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
Description
During
acceleration
When the output current (output torque during real sensorless vector control or vector
control) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall prevention
operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload
current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When
the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function
increases the frequency again.
During
constant-
speed
operation
operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current
decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When the
overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function
increases the frequency up to the set value.
During
deceleration
operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload
current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent shut-off. When
the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function
decreases the frequency again.
Check point
1. Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
2. Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
3. Check that the load is not too heavy.
4. Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
5. Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action
1. Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost value 1% by 1% and check the motor status. (Refer to page 50.)
2. Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 52.)
3. Reduce the load weight.
4. Try advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control or vector control.
5. Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting.
6. Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is
150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level
with Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention
operation selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)
Operation Panel
Indication
oL
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
oL
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
Description
During
deceleration
· If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the
regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in
frequency to prevent overvoltage shut-off. As soon as the regenerative energy has
decreased, deceleration resumes.
· If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration
avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to
prevent overvoltage shut-off. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point
· Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (Refer to section 4 of
Corrective action
The deceleration time may change.
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
Operation Panel
Indication
PS
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
PS
Name PU stop
Description Stop with of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr.
75, refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action Turn the start signal off and release with .

134
(3) Minor fault
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off. You can also output a minor fault signal by
making parameter setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to section 4
of Instruction Manual (applied).))
Operation Panel
Indication
RB
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
RB
Name Regenerative brake prealarm
Description
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake
duty value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP
signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point
• Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
• Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
Corrective action
• Increase the deceleration time.
• Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.
Operation Panel
Indication
TH
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
TH
Name Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Description
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the
preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload shut-off
(E. THM) occurs.
The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP
signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))
Check point
1. Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
2. Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 48.)
Corrective action
1. Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.
2. Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 48.)
Operation Panel
Indication
MT
FR-PU04 ————
FR-PU07 MT
Name Maintenance signal output
Description Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
Check point
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
setting. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erraces the signal.
Operation Panel
Indication
CP
FR-PU04 ————
FR-PU07 CP
Name Parameter copy
Description Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of 55K or less and 75K or more.
Check point
Resetting of Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 61, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr.
94, Pr. 158, Pr. 455, Pr. 458 to Pr. 462, Pr. 557, Pr. 859, Pr. 860 and Pr. 893 is necessary.
Corrective action Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
Operation Panel
Indication
SL
FR-PU04 ————
FR-PU07 SL
Name Speed limit indication (output during speed limit)
Description Output if the speed limit level is exceeded during torque control.
Check point
• Check that the torque command is not larger than required.
• Check that the speed limit level is not low.
Corrective action
• Decrease the torque command.
• Increase the speed limit level.
Operation Panel
Indication
FN
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
FN
Name Fan fault
Description For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan
stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for a fault.
Corrective action Check for fan fault. Please contact your sales representative.

135
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
(4) Major fault
When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and an alarm is output.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OC1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OC During Accs
Name Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration
Description
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point
1. Check for sudden acceleration.
2. Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.
3. Check for output short circuit.
4. Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is not 60Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50Hz.
5. Check that stall prevention operation is correct.
6. Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent due to increase in motor
current occurs.)
7. Check that the power supply for RS-485 terminal is not shorted. (under vector control)
8. Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to
forward) during torque control under real sensorless vector control.
Corrective action
1. Increase the acceleration time.
(Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
2. When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
3. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
4. Set the Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz. (Refer to page 49.)
5. Perform a correct stall prevention operation. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
6. Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to section 4 of
7. Check RS-485 terminal connection. (under vector control)
8. Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OC2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stedy Spd OC
Name Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed
Description
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated current during
constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
Check point
1. Check for sudden load change.
3. Check that stall prevention operation is correct
Corrective action
1. Keep load stable.
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OC3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OC During Dec
Name Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop
Description
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 220% of the rated inverter current
during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to
stop the inverter output.
Check point
1. Check for sudden speed reduction.
3. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action
1. Increase the deceleration time.
3. Check the mechanical brake operation.
4. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.(Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)

136
*1 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OV1
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OV During Acc
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration
Description
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration in vertical lift load)
Corrective action
· Decrease the acceleration time.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OV2
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stedy Spd OV
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed
Description
Check point Check for sudden load change.
Corrective action
· Keep load stable.
(applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OV3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OV During Dec
Name Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop
Description
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
Corrective action
· Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the inertia of moment of
the load)
· Decrease the braking duty.
(applied).)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.THT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Inv. Overload
Name Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) *1
Description
If a current not less than 150% of the rated output current flows and overcurrent shut-off does not occur
(220% or less), inverse-time characteristics cause the electronic thermal relay to be activated to stop
the inverter output in order to protect the output transistors. (overload immunity 150% 60s)
Check point Check the motor for use under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.THM
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Motor Overload
Name Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function) *1
Description
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced
cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the
temperature reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is
activated to stop the inverter output when the temperature reaches the specified value. When running
a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the inverter
output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
Check point
1. Check the motor for use under overload.
2. Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to section 4 of
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action
1. Reduce the load weight.
2. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor.
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual
(applied).)

137
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
E.FIN
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
H/Sink O/Temp
Name Fin overheat
Description
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink
overheat protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or
"126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to section 4 of
Check point
1. Check for too high ambient temperature.
2. Check for heatsink clogging.
3. Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that is displayed on the operation panel.)
Corrective action
1. Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.
2. Clean the heatsink.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.IPF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Inst. Pwr. Loss
Name Instantaneous power failure
Description
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the
instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to stop the inverter output in order to
prevent the control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the
alarm warning output is not provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is on upon power
restoration. (The inverter continues operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some
operating status (load magnitude, acceleration/deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other
protection may be activated upon power restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to section 4 of
Check point Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
Corrective action
· Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
· Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
· Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to section 4 of
Operation Panel
Indication
E.BE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Br. Cct. Fault
Name Brake transistor alarm detection
Description
This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake transistors.
In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
Check point
· Reduce the load inertia.
· Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.UVT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Under Voltage
Name Undervoltage
Description
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions.
In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if
the power supply voltage decreases below about 150VAC (300VAC for the 400V class), this function
stops the inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+-P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction
Manual (applied))
Check point
1. Check for start of large-capacity motor.
2. Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+-P1.
Corrective action
1. Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
2. Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+-P1.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.ILF
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Input phase loss
Name Input phase failure
Description
This alarm is output when function valid setting (= 1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection and
one phase of the three phase power input opens. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Check point Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Corrective action
· Wire the cables properly.
· Repair a brake portion in the cable.
· Check the Pr. 872 Input phase failure protection selection setting.

138
*2 Functions only when any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) is set to OH.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OLT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Stll Prev STP ( OL shown during stall
prevention operation)
Name Stall prevention
Description
If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, an alarm (E.OLT)
appears to shutoff the inverter output. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
When speed control is performed by real sensorless vector control or vector control, an alarm (E.OLT)
is displayed and the inverter output is stopped if frequency drops to the Pr. 865 Low speed detection
(initial value is 1.5Hz) setting by torque limit operation and the output torque exceeds Pr. 874 OLT level
setting (initial value is 150%) setting and remains for more than 3s.
Check point
· Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to section 4 of the Instruction Manual (applied).)
· Check that the Pr. 865 Low speed detection and Pr. 874 OLT level setting values are correct. (Check the
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
Corrective action
· Reduce the load weight.
· Change the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr. 865 Low speed detection and Pr. 874 OLT level
setting values. (Check the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level setting if V/F control is exercised.)
Operation Panel
Indication
E.GF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Ground Fault
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
Description
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth
(ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check point Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.LF
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
⎯⎯
Name Output phase failure
Description
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
(load side) opens.
Check point
· Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)
· Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
Corrective action
· Wire the cables properly.
· Check the Pr. 251 Output phase failure protection selection setting.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OHT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
OH Fault
Name External thermal relay operation *2
Description
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted
temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Check point
· Check for motor overheating.
· Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
Corrective action
· Reduce the load and operating duty.
· Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.PTC
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 PTC activated
Name PTC thermistor operation
Description
Appears when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor
input connected to the terminal AU.
Check point
· Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal protector.
· Check the motor for operation under overload.
· Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (Refer to section 4 of
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

139
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OPT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Option Fault
Name Option alarm
Description
Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when a
high power factor converter is connected.
Appears when torque command by the plug-in option is selected using Pr. 804 Torque command source
selection and no plug-in option is mounted.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point
· Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high power
factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is connected.
· Check that the plug-in option for torque command setting is connected.
Corrective action
· Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring.
· The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
· Check for connection of the plug-in option. Check the Pr. 804 Torque command source selection setting.
· Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OP3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Option slot alarm 3
Name Communication option alarm
Description Stops the inverter output when a communication line error occurs in the communication option.
Check point
· Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
· Check for a brake in the communication cable.
· Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
Corrective action
· Check the option function setting, etc.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Check the connection of communication cable.
Operation Panel
Indication
E. 1 to
E. 3
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 1 to Fault 3
Name Option alarm
Description
Stops the inverter output if a contact faullt, etc. of the connector between the inverter and plug-in option
occurs or if a communication option is fitted to the connector 1 or 2.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
Check point
1. Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
(1 to 3 indicate the option connector numbers.)
2. Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.
3. Check that the communication option is not fitted to the connector 1 or 2.
Corrective action
1. Connect the plug-in option securely.
2. Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative
or distributor.
3. Fit the communication option to the connector 3.
4. Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
Operation Panel
Indication
E.PE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Corrupt Memry
Name Parameter storage device alarm (control circuit board)
Description A fault occurred in parameters stored (EEPROM failure)
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Corrective action
Please contact your sales representative.
When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable
RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.
to

140
Operation Panel
Indication
E.PE2
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 PR storage alarm
Name Parameter storage device alarm (main circuit board)
Description A fault occurred in parameters stored (EEPROM failure)
Check point ——————
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.PUE
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
PU Leave Out
Name PU disconnection
Description
This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the
operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. This function stops the inverter output when communication errors
occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121
NumberofPUcommunicationretries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector. This function also stops
the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.
Check point
· Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.
· Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Corrective action Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.RET
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Retry No Over
Name Retry count excess
Description
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function stops the inverter
output.
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
Operation Panel
Indication
E. 6
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 6
E. 7 Fault 7
E.CPU CPU Fault
Name CPU error
Description Stops the inverter output if the communication error of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Corrective action
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
· Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.CTE
FR-PU04 ⎯⎯
FR-PU07 E.CTE
Name Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
Description
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power
output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used and RS-485 communication
from the PU connector cannot be made. When the power supply for the RS-485 terminals are shorted,
this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power off, then on again.
Check point
1. Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable.
2. Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
Corrective action
1. Check the PU and cable.
2. Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals
Operation Panel
Indication
E.MB1 to 7
FR-PU04 ⎯⎯
FR-PU07 E.MB1 Fault to E.MB7 Fault
Name Brake sequence error
Description
The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence
function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285). (Refer to page 209)
Check point Find the cause of alarm occurrence.
Corrective action Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.
to

141
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OS
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Overspeed occurrence
Name Overspeed occurence
Description
Appears when the motor speed reaches and exceeds the overspeed setting level under encoder
feedback control, real sensorless vector control or vector control.
Check point
· Check that the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value is correct.
· Check that the number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number of encoder pulses.
Corrective action
· Set the Pr. 374 Overspeed detection level value correctly.
· Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OSD
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Excessive speed deflection
Name Speed deviation excess detection
Description
Stops the inverter output if the motor speed is increased or decreased under the influence of the load
etc. during vector control and cannot be controlled in accordance with the speed command value.
Check point
· Check that the values of Pr. 285 Excessive speed deviation detection frequency and Pr. 853 Speed deviation
time are correct.
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check that the number of encoder pulses does not differ from the actual number of encoder pulses.
Corrective action
· Set Pr. 285 Excessive speed deviation detection frequency and Pr. 853 Speed deviation time correctly.
· Keep load stable.
· Set the correct number of encoder pulses in Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.ECT
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
No encoder signal
Name Signal loss detection
Description
Stops the inverter output when the encoder signal is shut off under orientation control, encoder
feedback control or vector control.
Check point
· Check for the encoder signal loss.
· Check that the encoder specifications are correct.
· Check for a loose connector.
· Check that the switch setting of the FR-A7AP is correct.
· Check that the power is supplied to the encoder. Or, check that the power is not supplied to the
encoder later than the inverter.
Corrective action
· Remedy the signal loss.
· Use an encoder that meets the specifications.
· Make connection securely.
· Make a switch setting of the FR-A7AP correctly. (Refer to page 29)
· Supply the power to the encoder. Or supply the power to the encoder at the same time when the
power is supplied to the inverter.
If the power is supplied to the encoder after the inverter, check that the encoder signal is securely
sent and set "0" in Pr. 376.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.OD
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 14
Excessive position error
Name Excessive position error
Description
Indicates that the difference between the position command and position feedback exceeded the
reference under position control.
Check point
· Check that the position detecting encoder mounting orientation matches the parameter.
· Check that the load is not large.
· Check that the Pr. 427 Excessive level error and Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses are correct.
Corrective action
· Check the parameters.
· Reduce the load weight.
· Set the Pr. 427 Excessive level error and Pr. 369 Number of encoder pulses correctly.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.EP
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 E.EP
Name Encoder phase error
Description
The rotation command of the inverter differs from the actual motor rotation direction detected from the
encoder during offline auto tuning.
Check point
· Check for mis-wiring of the encoder cable.
· Check for wrong setting of Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction.
Corrective action
· Perform connection and wiring securely.
· Change the Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction value.

142
Operation Panel
Indication
E.P24
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
E.P24
Name 24VDC power output short circuit
Description
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, all external contact inputs switch off. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES
signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power off, then on again.
Check point · Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
Corrective action · Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.CDO
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 OC detect level
Name Output current detection value exceeded
Description
This function is activated when the output current exceeds the Pr. 150 Output current detection level
setting.
Check point
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time,
Pr. 166 Output current detection signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.IOH
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Inrush overheat
Name Inrush current limit circuit alarm
Description
This function is activated when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush
current limit circuit failure
Check point
· Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
· Check that the primary side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the inrush current limit circuit
contactor (FR-A740-110K or more) is not fused.
· Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Corrective action
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.SER
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 VFD Comm error
Name Communication error (inverter)
Description
This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than
permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if
communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check point Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Corrective action Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.AIE
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 Analog in error
Name Analog input error
Description
Appears when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 2/4 set to
current input.
Check point
Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection, Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection and voltage/current
input switch. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).)
Corrective action
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection, Pr. 267 Terminal 4
input selection, and voltage/current input switch to voltage input.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.USB
FR-PU04 Fault 14
FR-PU07 USB comm error
Name USB communication error
Description
When the time set in Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval has broken, this function stops the
inverter output.
Check point Check the USB communication cable.
Corrective action
· Check the Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval setting.
· Check the USB communication cable.
· Increase the Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval setting. Or, change the setting to 9999.
(Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied))

143
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel
Indication
E.11
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 11
Name Opposite rotation deceleration error
Description
The speed may not decelerate during low speed operation if the rotation direction of the speed
command and the estimated speed differ when the rotation is changing from forward to reverse or from
reverse to forward during torque control under real sensorless vector control. At this time, the inverter
output is stopped if the rotation direction will not change, causing overload.
Check point
Check that the rotation direction is not switched from forward to reverse rotation (or from reverse to
Corrective action
· Prevent the motor from switching the rotation direction from forward to reverse (or from reverse to
· Please contact your sales representative.
Operation Panel
Indication
E.13
FR-PU04
FR-PU07
Fault 13
Name Internal circuit error
Description Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
Corrective action Please contact your sales representative.
CAUTION
• If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.EP, E.OD, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.USB are activated when using the
FR-PU04, "Fault 14" appears.
Also when the alarm history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
• If alarms other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.

144
Correspondences between digital and
actual characters
4.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters
displayed on the operation panel.
Actual Digital
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Actual Digital
A
B
C
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
D
Actual Digital
M
N
O
o
P
T
U
V
r
-
S

145
Check and clear of the alarm history
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.5 Check and clear of the alarm history
(1) Check for the alarm (major fault) history
Alarm history
Monitor/frequency setting
[Operation panel is used
for operation]
Parameter setting
[Parameter setting change]
[Operation for displaying alarm history]
Eight past alarms can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)
When no alarm exists, is displayed.
Output current
Flickering
Output voltage
Flickering
Flickering
Flickering
Press the
setting
dial.
Press the
setting
dial.
Press the
setting
dial.
Energization time
Alarm history number
(The number of past alarms is displayed.)
Flickering
Output frequency
Flickering Flickering

146
Check and clear of the alarm history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
· The alarm history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Alarm history clear.
DisplayOperation
setting mode.
3.
appears.
Flicker ··· Alarm history clear complete!!
6.Press to set.
· Press to read another parameter.
5.Turn to change it to the
setting value " ".
The parameter
number previously
read appears.

147
Check first when you have troubles
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.6 Check first when you have troubles
POINT
If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (initial value) then reset
the required parameter values and check again.
Check that Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is not selected.
4.6.1 Motor will not start
1) Check the Pr.0 Torque boost setting if V/F control is exercised. (Refer to page 50)
2) Check the main circuit
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied (operation panel display is provided).
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the jumper across P/+-P1 is connected.
3) Check the input signals
Check that start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input simultaneously.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. (When the frequency command is 0Hz and the
start command is entered, FWD or REV LED on the operation panel flickers.)
Check that the AU signal is on when terminal 4 is used for frequency setting.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
Check that the CS signal is not OFF with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function
is selected (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999").
Check that the sink or source jumper connector is fitted securely. (Refer to page 23)
4) Check the parameter settings
Check that the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings are correct.
Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is not greater than the running frequency.
Check that frequency settings of each running frequency (such as multi-speed operation) are not zero.
Check that especially the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is not zero.
5) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked.
Check that the Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting.
Check that the encoder wiring is correct. (during encoder feedback control or vector control)
Check that the Pr. 359 Encoder rotation direction setting under encoder feed back control or vector
control is correct.
Set "1" in Pr. 359 if "REV" on the operation panel is on when the forward command is given.
Check that the voltage/current input switch is correctly set for analog input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4
to 20mA).
4.6.2 Motor generates abnormal noise
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are generated.
Check for any mechanical looseness.
Soft-PWM control to change the motor tone into an unoffending complex tone is factory-set to valid
by Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.
Adjust Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to change the motor tone.
Contact the motor manufacturer.
Check that the gain value under real sensorless vector control or vector control is not too high. Check the
setting of Pr. 820 (Pr. 830) Speed control P gain when speed control is exercised and Pr. 824 (Pr. 834) Torque
control P gain when torque control is exercised.

148
4.6.3 Motor generates heat abnormally
Is the fan for the motor is running? (Check for accumulated dust.)
Check that the load is not too heavy. Lighten the load.
Check that the inverter output voltages (U, V, W) balanced.
Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is correct.
Was the motor type set? Check the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor.
When using any other manufacturer's motor, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 62.)
4.6.4 Motor rotates in opposite direction
Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly. (Refer to page 78)
4.6.5 Speed greatly differs from the setting
Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.)
Check that the Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 19, Calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings are correct.
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise.
(Use shielded cables)
Check that the Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are correct.
4.6.6 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large and the stall prevention function is
not activated under V/F control.
4.6.7 Motor current is large
Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is appropriate.
Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is appropriate.
Check that the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting is appropriate.
Check that the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting is appropriate.
4.6.8 Speed does not increase
Check that the maximum frequency (Pr. 1) setting is correct. (If you want to run the motor at 120Hz or
more, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency. (Refer to section 4 of Instruction Manual (applied).))
(In agitators, etc., load may become heavier in winter.)
Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals P/+-P1 accidentally.
Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46, Pr. 112) setting is not too large and the stall prevention function is
not activated under V/F control.

149
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Others
4.6.9 Speed varies during operation
Check that the load is not varying.
2) Check the input signals
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise. Input filter to the analog input
terminal using Pr. 74 Input filter time constant and Pr. 822 Speed setting filter 1.
Check for a malfunction due to undesirable currents when the transistor output unit is connected.
(Refer to page 24)
Check that the settings of Pr. 80 Motor capacity and Pr. 81 Number of motor poles are correct to the
inverter capacity and motor capacity under advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless
vector control or vector control.
Check that the wiring length is not too long for V/F control.
Check that the wiring length is not exceeding 30m when advanced magnetic flux vector control, real
sensorless vector control or vector control is exercised. Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to section 4
of Instruction Manual (applied))
When advanced magnetic flux vector control, real sensorless vector control, vector control or encoder
feedback control is exercised, the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is
a normal operation and is not a fault.
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about 3%) under V/F control.
4.6.10 Operation mode is not changed properly
Check that the STF or STR signal is off.
When it is on, the operation mode cannot be changed.
2) Parameter setting
Check the Pr. 79 setting.
When the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial value), the inverter is placed in the
external operation mode at input power-on. At this time, press on the operation panel (press
when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) to switch to the PU operation mode.
If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
4.6.11 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating
Check that the operation panel is connected to the inverter securely.
4.6.12 POWER lamp is not lit
Check that wiring is securely performed and installation is correct.
4.6.13 Parameter write cannot be performed
Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external operation mode.
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.

150
Inspection item
5 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent
any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust,
dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
• Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing
the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make
sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+-N/− of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester,
etc.
5.1 Inspection item
5.1.1 Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Unusual vibration and noise
(5) Unusual overheat and discoloration
During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.
5.1.2 Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault.................Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening...........The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 15, 16)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.

151
Inspection item
5
PRECAUTIONSFORMAINTENANCEANDINSPECTION
5.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
*2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
Areaof
Inspection
Inspection Item Description
Interval
Corrective Action at
Alarm Occurrence
Customer's
Check
Daily
Periodic
*2
General
Surrounding
environment
Check the ambient temperature, humidity, dirt,
corrosive gas, oil mist , etc.
Improve emvironment
Overall unit Check for unusual vibration and noise.
Check alarm location and
retighten
Power supply
voltage
Check that the main circuit voltages and control
voltages are normal.*1
Inspect the power supply
Main
circuit
General
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts. Retighten
(3)Check for overheat traces on the parts. Contact the manufacturer
(4)Check for stain. Clean
Conductors, cables
(1)Check conductors for distortion.
(2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.).
Transformer/reactor
Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in
whining sound.
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Terminal block Check for damage.
the manufacturer.
Smoothing
aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage. Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge. Contact the manufacturer
(3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
main circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 152)
Relay/contactor
Check that the operation is normal and no chatter
is heard.
Resistor
(1)Check for crack in resistor insulation. Contact the manufacturer
(2)Check for a break in the cable. Contact the manufacturer
Control
circuit
protective
circuit
Operation check
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases
with the inverter operated alone is balanced.
(2)Check that no fault is found in protective and
display circuits in a sequence protective
operation test.
Partscheck
Overall
(1)Check for unusual odor and discoloration.
the manufacturer.
(2)Check for serious rust development. Contact the manufacturer
Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor
(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and
deformation trance.
(2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 152.)
Cooling
system
Cooling fan
(1)Check for unusual vibration and noise. Replace the fan
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts. Retighten
Heatsink
(1)Check for clogging. Clean
Air filter, etc.
(1)Check for clogging. Clean or replace
(2)Check for stain. Clean or replace
Display
Indication
(1)Check that display is normal. Contact the manufacturer
Meter Check that reading is normal.
the manufacturer.
Load
motor
Operation check
Check for vibration and abnormal increase in
operation noise.
the manufacturer.

152
Inspection item
5.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts
The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit is near to give an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (2) is
not performed. (Refer to page 153.)
(1) Display of the life alarm
· Pr. 255 Life alarm status display can be used to confirm that the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor,
cooling fan, and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level.
Parts Judgement Level
Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity
Control circuit capacitor Estimated 10% life remaining
Inrush current limit circuit Estimated 10% life remaining (Power on: 100,000 times left)
Cooling fan Less than 50% of the predetermined speed
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC
voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off
to prevent an electric shock.
Pr. 255
(decimal)
Bit
(binary)
Inrush Current
Limit Circuit Life
Cooling
Fan Life
Main Circuit
Capacitor Life
Control Circuit
Capacitor Life
15 1111
14 1110
13 1101
12 1100
11 1011
10 1010
9 1001
8 1000
7 0111
6 0110
5 0101
4 0100
3 0011
2 0010
1 0001
0 0000
: with alarm, : without alarm
POINT
Life check of the main circuit capacitor needs to be done by Pr. 259. (Refer to the following.)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
1
15bit 7 0
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
• Pr.255 read
Bit image is displayed
in decimal
• Pr.255 setting read

153
Inspection item
5
(2) Measuring method of life of the main circuit capacitor
· If the value of capacitor capacity measured before shipment is considered as 100%, Pr. 255 bit1 is turned on when
the measured value falls below 85%.
· Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259
3) Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is off.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is off, power on again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, then read Pr .255 and check the life of the main circuit
capacitor.
5.1.5 Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
5.1.6 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
*1 Replacement years for when the yearly average ambient temperature is 40°C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
*2 Output current : equivalent to rating current of the Mitsubishi standard motor (4 poles)
REMARKS
· The life of the main circuit capacitor can not be measured in the following conditions.
(a)FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV, FR-BU, MT-RC, MT-BU5 or BU is connected.
(b)Terminal R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/+ and N/−.
(c)Switch power on during measuring.
(d)The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e)The motor is running.(The motor is coasting.)
(f)The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g)The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off.
(h)The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i)The start command is given while measuring.
· Operating environment:Ambient temperature (annual average 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and
dirt))
Output current (80% of the rated current of Mitsubishi standard 4P motor)
POINT
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn off of
the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC
voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off
to prevent an electric shock.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and
alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
Part Name Standard Replacement Interval *1 Description
Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing capacitor 10 years *2 Replace (as required)
On-board smoothing capacitor 10 years Replace the board (as required)
Relays − as required
Fuse (160K or more) 10 years Replace the fuse (as required)
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.

154
Inspection item
(1) Cooling fan
The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit
semiconductor is greatly affected by the ambient temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during
inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
Inverter Type Fan Type Units
A720
1.5K to 3.7K MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1
5.5K to 11K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2
15K, 18.5K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
22K
MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
30K to 55K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 2
75K, 90K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 3
A740
2.2K, 3.7K MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01 1
5.5K to 15K MMF-08D24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1639H01 2
18.5K, 22K MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01 1
30K MMF-09D24TS-RP1 BKO-CA1640H01 2
37K to 55K
MMF-12D24DS-RP1 BKO-CA1619H01
2
75K to 132K 3
160K, 185K
9LB1424H5H03
3
220K to 280K 4
315K, 355K 5
400K to 500K 9LB1424S5H04 6
The FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K, FR-A740-0.4K to 1.5K are not provided with a cooling fan.
• Removal (FR-A720-1.5K to 90K, FR-A740-2.2K to 132K)
1)Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.
2)Disconnect the fan connectors.
3)Remove the fan.
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K
FR-A720-5.5K to 22K
FR-A740-5.5K to 22K
FR-A720-30K or more
FR-A740-30K to 132K
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (Refer to the table above)
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K
FR-A720-5.5K to 22K
FR-A740-5.5K to 22K
FR-A720-30K or more
FR-A740-30K to 132K
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan
Fan
Fan
Fan connection
connector
Fan connection
connector
Fan connection
connector
*
*

155
Inspection item
5
• Reinstallation (FR-A720-1.5K to 90K, FR-A740-2.2K to 132K)
1)After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
<Fan side face>
2)Reconnect the fan connectors.
3)Reinstall the fan cover.
AIR FLOW
FR-A720-5.5K to 11K
FR-A740-5.5K to 15KFR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K
FR-A720-22KFR-A720-15K, 18.5K
FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
FR-A720-30K or more
FR-A740-30K to 132K
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.
1. Insert hooks into
holes.
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K
you hear a click
sound.
holes.
FR-A720-5.5K to 22K
FR-A740-5.5K to 22K
you hear a click
sound.
holes.
FR-A720-30K or more
FR-A740-30K to 132K
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
• Switch the power off before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power off,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.

156
Inspection item
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment
(FR-A7CN)
• Removal (FR-A740-160K or more)
1) Remove a fan cover.
2) After removing a fan connector, remove a fan block.
3) Remove the fan.
* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity. (refer to page 154.)
• Reinstallation (FR-A740-160K or more)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
<Fan side face>
2) Install fans referring to the above figure.
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the
heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement.
After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the
original position.
Fan *
Fan connection
connector
1)
2)
3)
AIR FLOW
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
• Switch the power off before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power off,
replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.
Top cover

157
Inspection item
5
(3) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated
by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the ambient temperature and operating conditions. When the inverter is
operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
Refer to page 153 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
(4) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).
5.1.7 Inverter replacement
The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring
cover of the inverter.
1)Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.
2)Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.
CAUTION
Before starting inverter replacement, switch power off, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and
such to ensure safety.

158
Rating
6 SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Rating
6.1.1 Inverter rating
200V class
Type FR-A720- K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Output
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.2 6.7 9.2 12.6 17.6 23.3 29 34 44 55 67 82 110 132
Rated current (A) *3 3 5 8 11 17.5 24 33 46 61 76 90 115 145 175 215
288
(245)
346
(294)
Overload current rating *4 150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse time characteristics) ambient temperature 50°C
Voltage *5 Three-phase 200 to 240V
Regenerative
braking torque
Maximum value/
permissible duty
150% torque/
3%ED*6
100% torque/
3%ED*6
100% torque/
2%ED*6
20% torque/
continuous *6
20% torque/
continuous
10% torque/
continuous
Powersupply
Rated input
AC voltage/frequency
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 242V 50Hz,170 to 264V 60Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100 110 132
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Enclosed type (IP20) *8 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 1.9 2.3 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 13 13 14 23 35 35 58 70 70
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
*3. When operating the inverter of 75K or more with a value larger than 2kHz set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, the rated output current is the value in
parenthesis.
*4. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power supply.
*6. With the dedicated external brake resistor FR-ABR (option), the 0.4K and 0.75K, 1.5K to 7.5K, 11K to 22K will achieve the performance of 150% torque/
10%ED, 100% torque/10%ED and 100% torque/6%ED respectively.
*7. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*8. When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00).
*9. FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
2

159
Rating
6
SPECIFICATIONS
400V class
Type FR-A740- K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Output
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 1.1 1.9 3 4.6 6.9 9.1 13 17.5 23.6 29 32.8 43.4 54 65 84
Rated current (A) 1.5 2.5 4 6 9 12 17 23 31 38 44 57 71 86 110
Voltage *6 Three-phase 380 to 480V
Regenerative
braking torque
Maximum value/
permissible duty
100% torque/2%ED*6 20% torque/continuous *6 20% torque/continuous
Powersupply
Rated input
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9 12 17 20 28 34 41 52 66 80 100
Protective structure *9 Enclosed type (IP20) *9 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 7.1 7.1 7.5 7.5 13 13 23 35 35 37
Type FR-A740- K 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Applicable motor capacity (kW) *1 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Output
Rated capacity (kVA) *2 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 587 660 733
Rated current (A)*3
144
(122)
180
(153)
216
(184)
260
(221)
325
(276)
361
(307)
432
(367)
481
(409)
547
(465)
610
(519)
683
(581)
770
(655)
866
(736)
962
(818)
Voltage*5 Three-phase 380 to 480V
Regenerative
braking torque
Maximum value/
permissible duty
10% torque/continuous
Powersupply
Rated input
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 323 to 528V 50Hz/60H
Power supply capacity (kVA) *7 110 137 165 198 248 275 329 367 417 465 521 587 660 733
Protective structure (JEM 1030) *9 Open type (IP00)
Cooling system Forced air cooling
Approx. mass (kg) 50 57 72 72 110 110 175 175 175 260 260 370 370 370
*1. The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
*2. The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
*3. When operating the inverter of 75K or more with a value larger than 2kHz set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, the rated output current is the value in
parenthesis.
*4. The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*5. The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about that of the power supply.
*6. With the dedicated external brake resistor FR-ABR-H (option), the 0.4K to 7.5K and 11K to 22K will achieve the performance of 100% torque/10%ED and
100% torque/6%ED respectively.
*7. The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*8. When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (IP00).
*9. FR-DU07:IP40 (except for the PU connector)
2

160
Rating
6.1.2 Motor rating
(1) SF-V5RU
*1 80% output in the high-speed range. (The output is reduced when the speed is 2400r/min or more. Contact us separately for details.)
*2 A dedicated motor of 3.7kW or less can be run at the maximum speed of 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office when using the motor at the maximum speed.
*3 Power (current) at 50Hz/60Hz.
*4 Since a motor with brake has a window for gap check, the protective structure of both the cooling fan section and brake section is IP20. S of IP23S is an
additional code indicating the condition that protection from water intrusion is established only when a cooling fan is not operating.
*5 The value when high carrier frequency is set (Pr.72 = 6, Pr.240 = 0).
200V class (Mitsubishi dedicated motor [SF-V5RU (1500r/min series)])
Motor type
SF-V5RU K
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
Applicable inverter type
FR-A720- K
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 *1 37 *1 45 *1 55
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque 150%
60s (N·m)
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 *2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J
(×10-4kg·m2)
67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
Noise *5 75dB or less 80dB or less
85dB
or less
Cooling fan
(with thermal
protector)
Voltage Single-phase 200V/50Hz
Single-phase 200V to 230V/60Hz
Three-phase 200V/50Hz
Three-phase 200 to 230V/60Hz
Input *3
36/55W
(0.26/0.32A)
22/28W
(0.11/0.13A)
55/71W
(0.39/0.39A)
100/156W
(0.47/0.53A)
85/130W
(0.46/0.52A)
Ambient temperature,
humidity
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure
(Protective structure)
Totally enclosed forced draft system
(Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *4
Detector Encoder 2048P/R, A phase, B phase, Z phase +12VDC power supply
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Heat resistance class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320
400V class (Mitsubishi dedicated motor [SF-V5RUH (1500r/min series)])
Motor type
SF-V5RUH K
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18 22 30 37 45 55
Applicable inverter type
FR-A740- K
2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
Rated output (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 *1 37 *1 45 *1 55
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.0 95.5 118 140 191 235 286 350
Maximum torque 150% 60s
(N·m)
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176 211 287 353 429 525
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 *2 2400
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 200L 200L 200L 225S
Inertia moment J
(×10-4kg·m2)
67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725 1875 3250 3625 3625 6850
Noise *5 75dB or less 80dB or less
85dB or
less
Cooling fan
(with thermal
protector)
Voltage
Single-phase 200V/50Hz
Single-phase 200V to 230V/60Hz
Input *3
36/55W
(0.26/0.32A)
22/28W
(0.11/0.13A)
55/71W
(0.19/0.19A)
100/156W
(0.27/0.30A)
85/130W
(0.23/0.26A)
Ambient temperature,
humidity
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure
(Protective structure)
Totally enclosed forced draft system
(Motor: IP44, cooling fan: IP23S) *4
Heat resistance class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138 160 238 255 255 320

161
Rating
6
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) SF-THY
200Vclass
Motor type SF-THY
Applicable inverter FR-A720- K 90
Rated output(kW) 75
Rated torque (kgf·m)
(N·m)
48.7
477
Maximum torque (kgf·m)
150%60s (N·m)
73.0
715
Maximum speed (r/min) 2400
Frame No. 250MD
Inertia moment J (kg·m2) 1.1
Noise 90dB
Cooling fan
Voltage
Three-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V/60Hz, 220V/60Hz
(400V class cooling fan is available upon order)
Input (W) 750
Approx. mass (kg) 610
400Vclass
Motor type SF-THY
Applicable inverter FR-A740- K 90 110 132 160 185 220 280
Rated output (kW) 75 90 110 132 160 200 250
Rated torque (kgf·m)
(N·m)
48.7
477
58.4
572
71.4
700
85.7
840
103.9
1018
129.9
1273
162.3
1591
Maximum torque (kgf·m)
150%60s (N·m)
73.0
715
87.6
858
107.1
1050
128.5
1260
155.8
1527
194.8
1909
243.4
2386
Maximum speed (r/min) 2400 1800
Frame No. 250MD 250MD 280MD 280MD 280MD 280L 315H
Inertia moment J (kg·m2) 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.3 4.0 3.8 5.0
Noise 90dB 95dB
Cooling fan
Voltage
Three-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V/60Hz, 220V/60Hz
(400V class cooling fan is available upon order)
Input (W)
50Hz 400 400 400 400 400 750 750
60Hz 750 750 750 750 750 1500 1500
Approx. mass (kg) 610 660 870 890 920 1170 1630
Commonspecifications
Ambient temperature, humidity -10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Structure Totally enclosed forced draft system
Insulation Class F
Vibration rank V10
Dedicated
Encoder
Resolution 2048 pulse/rev
Power supply voltage 12VDC±10%
Current consumption 90mA
Output signal form A, B phases (90° phase shift) Z phase: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Complimentary (constant voltage output matched by emitter follow)
Output voltage
"H" level: Power supply voltage 9V or more (IOH: -20mA)
"L" level: Power supply voltage 3V or less (IOL: 20mA)

162
Common specifications
6.2 Common specifications
*1. Available only when the option (FR-A7AP) is mounted
*2. Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
*3. Can be displayed only on the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU04).
*4. Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
*5. 2.9m/s2 or less for the 160K or more.
Controlspecifications
Control method
Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (selectable from among V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control and
real sensorless vector control) / vector control (when used with option FR-A7AP)*1.
Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz (The maximum frequency is 120Hz under real sensorless vector control and vector control.)
Frequency
setting
resolution
Analog input
0.015Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit)
0.03Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/about 11bit, terminal 1: 0 to ±10V/12bit)
0.06Hz/0 to 60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11bit)
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency
accuracy
Analog input Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C±10°C)
Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz Constant torque/variable torque pattern or adjustable 5 points V/F can be selected
Starting torque 200% 0.3Hz (0.4K to 3.7K), 150% 0.3Hz (5.5K or more) (under real sensorless vector control or vector control)
Torque boost Manual torque boost
Acceleration/deceleration time
setting
0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration mode, backlash
measures acceleration/deceleration can be selected.
DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level can be set (0 to 220% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Torque limit level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable)
Operationspecifications
Frequency
setting
signal
Analog input • Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA) can be selected• Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to +5V can be selected
Digital input
Input using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit
Four-digit BCD or 16 bit binary (when used with option FR-A7AX)
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Input signals
You can select any twelve signals using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) from among multi speed selection, remote setting,
stop-on-contact, second function selection, third function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, selection of
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, flying start, external thermal relay input, inverter operation enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV
connection), FR-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection), PU operation/external inter lock signal , external DC injection brake
operation start, PID control enable terminal, brake opening completion signal, PU operation/external operation switchover, load pattern
selection forward rotation reverse rotation boost, V/F switching, load torque high-speed frequency, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration C
switchover, pre-excitation, output stop, start self-holding selection, control mode changing, torque limit selection, start-time tuning start
external input, torque bias selection 1, 2 *1., P/PI control switchover, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset,
PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation switchover, NET-external operation switchover, and
command source switchover, conditional position pulse train sign *1., conditional position droop pulse clear *1., DC feeding operation
permission, DC feeding cancel, magnetic flux decay output shutoff.
Pulse train input 100kpps
Operational functions
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, polarity reversible operation,
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, electronic bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote
setting, brake sequence, second function, third function, multi-speed operation, original operation continuation at instantaneous power
failure, stop-on-contact control, load torque high speed frequency control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation,
operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, online auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485),
motor end orientation*1., machine end orientation*1., pre-excitation, notch filter, machine analyzer*1., easy gain tuning, speed feed
forward, and torque bias*1.
Outputsignals
Operating status
You can select any signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) from among inverter running, up-to-frequency,
instantaneous power failure/undervoltage, overload warning, output frequency (speed) detection, second output frequency (speed)
detection, third output frequency (speed) detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU
operation mode, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward
rotation reverse rotation output, electronic bypass MC1, electronic bypass MC2, electronic bypass MC3, orientation completion*1., brake
opening request, fan fault output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm , inverter running/start command on, deceleration at an instantaneous
power failure, PID control activated, during retry, PID output interruption, life alarm, alarm output 1, 2, 3 (power-off signal), power savings
average value update timing, current average monitor, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, forward rotation output*1., reverse
rotation output*1., low speed output, torque detection, regenerative status output *1., start-time tuning completion, in-position
completion*1., minor failure output and alarm output. Open collector output (5 points), relay output (2 points) and alarm code of the
inverter can be output (4 bit) from the open collector.
When used with the
FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR
(option)
In addition to the above, you can select any signals using Pr. 313 to Pr. 319 (extension output terminal function selection) from among control
circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life. (only positive logic can be set for extension
terminals of the FR-A7AR)
Pulse train output 50kpps
Pulse/analog output
You can select any signals using Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection (pulse train output) and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection (analog
output) from among output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, operation speed, motor
torque, converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load
meter, motor excitation current, reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty ,PID set
point, PID measured value, motor output, torque command, torque current command, and torque monitor.
Indication
PU
(FR-DU07/
FR-PU07/
FR-PU04)
Operating status
Output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output voltage, frequency setting, running speed,motor torque, overload,
converter output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter,
motor excitation current, cumlative energization time, actual operation time, motor load factor, cumulative power, energy saving effect,
cumulative saving power, regenerative brake duty, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor,
input terminal option monitor*2., output terminal option monitor*2., option fitting status*3., terminal assignment status*3., torque
command, torque current command, feed back pulse*1.,motor output
Alarm definition
Alarm definition is displayed during the protective function is activated, the output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization
time right before the protection function was activated and past 8 alarm definitions are stored.
Interactive guidance Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function*3.
Protective/warning function
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration,
overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal
operation, heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase failure, motor overload, output side
earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output short circuit, main circuit element overheat, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation,
PTC thermistor operation, option alarm, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess, CPU alarm, operation panel power
supply short circuit, 24VDC power output short circuit, output current detection value excess, inrush current limit circuit alarm,
communication alarm (inverter), USB error, opposite rotation deceleration error, analog input error, fan fault, overcurrent stall prevention,
overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer
alarm*2., brake transistor alarm, parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy alarm, speed limit
indication, encoder no-signal*1., speed deviation large*1., overspeed*1., position error large*1., encoder phase error*1.
Environment
Ambient temperature -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
Ambient humidity 90%RH maximum (non-condensing)
Storage temperature*4. -20°C to +65°C
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s2
or less *5.

163
Outline dimension drawings
6
SPECIFICATIONS
6.3 Outline dimension drawings
6.3.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings
FR-A720-0.4K, 0.75K
FR-A720-1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
FR-A740-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
2-φ6 hole
260
2457.5
6
110 D
5
7.5
95
D1
Inverter Type D D1
FR-A720-0.4K 110 21
FR-A720-0.75K 125 36
260
150
125
6
140
5
7.57.5245
2-φ6 hole
144
45.5
* The FR-A740-0.4K to
1.5K are not provided
with a cooling fan.

164
FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K
FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K, 15K
FR-A720-15K, 18.5K, 22K
FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
H1
H
D
2-φ6 hole
7.5
220
195
211
106
7.5D1
Inverter Type H H1 D D1
FR-A720-5.5K, 7.5K
FR-A740-5.5K, 7.5K
260 245 170 84
FR-A720-11K
FR-A740-11K, 15K
300 285 190 101.5
10
230
250
3801010
400
190
10.5
101.5
250
2-φ10 hole

165
6
SPECIFICATIONS
FR-A720-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K
FR-A740-30K, 37K, 45K, 55K
FR-A740-75K, 90K
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
W2
W
W1
H1
H
H210
D
3.2
2-φd hole
Inverter Type W W1 W2 H H1 H2 d D
FR-A720-30K
FR-A740-30K
325 270 10 550 530 10 10 195
FR-A720-37K, 45K
FR-A740-37K, 45K, 55K
435 380 12 550 525 15 12 250
FR-A720-55K 465 410 12 700 675 15 12 250
300
3.2
465
400
2-φ12hole
620
5951015
(for M6 screw)
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Earth (ground) terminal
Rating plate
2-terminal
E
P1 P P1, P
(for M12 bolt)
Within D
W1
H1
H10
W 2
DC Reactor
Type
W W1 H H1 D
Mass
(Kg)
FR-HEL-H75K
(FR-A740-75K)
140 120 320 295 185 16
FR-HEL-H90K
(FR-A740-90K)
150 130 340 310 190 20
DC reactor supplied

166
FR-A720-75K, 90K
FR-A740-110K, 132K
DC reactor supplied
(Unit: mm)
360
715
740
465
400
1015
3.2
2-φ12 hole
DC Reactor Type W W1 H H1 D S Mass (kg)
FR-HEL-75K (FR-A720-75K) 150 130 340 310 190 M6 17
FR-HEL-90K (FR-A720-90K) 150 130 340 310 200 M6 19
FR-HEL-H110K (FR-A740-110K) 150 130 340 310 195 M6 22
FR-HEL-H132K (FR-A740-132K) 175 150 405 370 200 M8 26
E
P1
P
P1
P
W1
Within D(for S screw)
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Rating plate
(for M12 bolt)
2-terminal
H1
H10
W 2

167
6
SPECIFICATIONS
FR-A740-160K, 185K
FR-A740-220K, 250K, 280K
(Unit: mm)
(Unit: mm)
1598510
1010
4920020049
498
12
380
3.2
450
148.5214.5
185
3-φ12 hole
E
P1
P
P1
P
W1
Within D(for S screw)
4-installation hole
(for M6 screw)
Rating plate
(for M12 bolt)
2-terminal
H1
H10
W 2
DC Reactor Type W W1 H H1 D S
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H160K
(FR-A740-160K)
175 150 405 370 205 M8 28
FR-HEL-H185K
(FR-A740-185K)
175 150 405 370 240 M8 29
DC reactor supplied
984
1010
3-φ12 hole
12
300 300
680
3.2
380
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3 P1
N/-
P/+
U W
V
148214
185
E
P1
P
P1
P
H110
H10
(for S1 screw)
Rating plate
2-S2 eye nut
* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
4-installation hole
(for S screw) Within D
2-terminal (for bolt)
W1 1
W 2
DC Reactor
Type
W W1 H H1 D S S1 S2 φ
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H220K
(FR-A740-220K)
175 150 405 370 240 M8 M6 M6 M12 30
FR-HEL-H250K
(FR-A740-250K)
190 165 440 400 250 M8 M8 M8 M12 35
FR-HEL-H280K
(FR-A740-280K)
190 165 440 400 255 M8 M8 M8 M16 38
DC reactor supplied

168
FR-A740-315K, 355K
DC reactor supplied
(Unit: mm)
3-φ12 hole
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
N/-
P1
P/+
U W
V
790 440
4.5 4.5
185
22219413001515
1330315
12
315
E
P1
P
P1
P
185
210
45010
49510
(for M8 screw)
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw) Within 250
2-terminal (for M16 bolt)
DC Reactor Type Mass (kg)
FR-HEL-H315K (FR-A740-315K) 42
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-A740-355K) 46

169
6
SPECIFICATIONS
FR-A740-400K, 450K, 500K
(Unit: mm)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- U V W
300300300
12
995
1580
440
1550
950
222194
4-φ12 hole
4.54.5
P1 P/+
185
E
P
P1
P1
P
75
40
40
50010
45510
220
195
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut2-terminal
4- 15 hole
(for M8 screw)
Within D
Within W
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
DC Reactor Type W D
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H400K
(FR-A740-400K)
235 250 50
FR-HEL-H450K
(FR-A740-450K)
240 270 57
P
P1
P P1
E
40
75
40
150
215
D1 10
D 10
Rating plate
2-terminal
4- 15 hole
(for M12 screw)
Within 245
WithinH
2-M12 eye nut
4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)
DC Reactor Type H D D1
Mass
(kg)
FR-HEL-H500K
(FR-A740-500K)
345 455 405 67
DC reactor supplied DC reactor supplied

170
(Unit: mm)
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
(Unit: mm)
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU04)
(Unit: mm)
2-M3 screw
Panel
Cable
Air-
bleeding
hole
FR-DU07
Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP option)
<Outline drawing> <Panel cutting dimension drawing>
78
50
44
723 3
81
33
16
25
3.2max
72
44
21
20
22
27.8
6
80.3
(14.2)
2.550
(11.45)
25.05
135
83
*1
*1
*1
*1
6751
40
56.8
57.8
26.5
4-R1
4-φ4 hole
(Effective depth of the installation
screws hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
26.5
40
Air-bleeding
hole
*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for fixing
the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screws hole.
5-φ4 hole
Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screws hole.
40
23.75
11.75
81.5
1.25
1.513
17
16.5
1.5
125
72 15 10.5
18.5
40
80
48
24
13
20
21.5
14.5
5-M3 screw
Effective
depth of the
installation
screws hole 4.5
(Unit: mm)

171
6
SPECIFICATIONS
6.3.2 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type)
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
Note)1. Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
2. Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling.
Also, check that the ventilation direction of a fan is from the opposite load side to the load side.
3 The size difference of top and bottom of the shaft center height is
4 The 400V class motor has -H at the end of its type name.
Frame Number 90L
SF-V5RU(H)
Frame Number 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
SF-V5RU(H) , , ,
Frame Number 160M, 160L, 180M, 180L
SF-V5RU(H) , , ,
Frame Number 200L, 225S
SF-V5RU(H) , , ,
SF-V5RU
K
SF-V5RU
K1
SF-V5RU
K3
SF-V5RU
K4
Frame
No.
Mass
(kg)
Motor
Terminal Screw
Size
A B C D E F H I KA KG KL(KP) L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
1 — — — 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 — 53 65 220(210) 425 175 — 150 56 — — 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 1 — — 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 2 1 — 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 3 2 — 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 — 254 108 — — 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 — 298 108 — — 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 — — —
180M
138
438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 — 285 121 — — 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 160
— 18 15 5 180L 200 457.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 359 410 146 139 352 828 335 — 323 121 — — 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — 7
200L
238
483.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 401 — 145 487 (546) 909 390 — 361 133 — — 425.5 60m6 — — — M10 M4 M4
30, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 255
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 320 500 277 225 446 178 143 446 — 145 533 (592) 932 428 — 342 149 — — 432 65m6 — — — M10 M4 M4
1K 2K 3K 5K 7K
S
T
W
U
Section AA
15
9
Frame leg viewed from above
Sliding distance
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Suction
40
50
L
A
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
XBFF
N
KA
B
Ｒ
A
A
D
φ27
4
C
H
KG
KL
EE
M
KP
4
12
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above
S
U
T
W
Section AA
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
φ27
40
EE
M
ML
6.5
C
H
I
KG
D
KL
MS3102A20-29P
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Suction
XBFF
N
QKKA
QBA
Ｒ
L
A
A
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B)
Thermal protector (G1, G2)
A B G2G1U V W
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K 55K
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
terminal (M8)
With guard
wires
Exhaust
Suction
MS3102A20-29P
φ56
KG
XB
FF
N
90KA
110BA
Ｒ
L
50
EE
M
D
KL
8
C
H
I
A
A
Section AA
T
U
S
W
14.5
4
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above Frame leg viewed
from above
4
18.5
Sliding distance
S
W
T
U
Section AA
MS3102A20-29P
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
terminal (M12)
With guard
wires
KG
KP
L
A
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Suction
φ90
70
EE
M
11
C
H
D
XBFF
N
110KA
140B
Ｒ
A
A
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation foot
as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
0
-0.5

172
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard horizontal type with brake)
5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
Frame Number 90L
SF-V5RU(H)
SF-V5RU(H) , , ,
SF-V5RU(H) , , ,
Frame Number 200L, 225S
SF-V5RU(H) , , ,
SF-V5RU
K
SF-V5RU
K1
SF-V5RU
K3
SF-V5RU
K4
Frame
No.
Mass
(kg)
Motor Shaft End Terminal Screw Size
A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2 B1,B2
1 — — — 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 — — — 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 — 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 1 — — 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 — — 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 2 1 — 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 — — 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 3 2 — 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 — — 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 — — 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 — — 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 — — 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
18 — — —
180M
185
568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 — — 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 215
— 18 15 5 180L 255 587.5 242.5 180 363 139.5 139.5 8 — — 50 146 56 139 352 428 958 335 — 323 4 121 14.5 110 90 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4 M4
30 — — 7
200L
305
644.5 267.5 200 406 159 152.5 11 — — 70 145 90 487 — 546 1070 390 — 361 4 133 18.5 140 110 425.5 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
30, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 330
55 37 30 11, 15 225S 395 659 277 225 446 178 143 11 — — 70 145 90 533 — 592 1091 428 — 342 4 149 18.5 140 110 432 65m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4 M4
1KB 2KB 3KB 5KB 7KB
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above
Z
X
Section AA
U
W
T
S
MS3102A20-29P
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Earth (ground)
terminal (M5)
A
A
R
B
N
F F XB
50
40
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Terminal box for cooling fan
L
A
KA
M
E E
C
G
D
φ22
2
2
11
KL
KP
KG
φ27
Main
terminal box
MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground)
terminal (M5)
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of
cooling fan wind
A
A
R
N
F F XB
C
G
D
ML
M
E E
J
B Q
QKMain
terminal box
A
L
φ22
φ27
KA
KL
KP
H
KG
Section AA
W
S
U
T
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above
Z
X
1
2
1
2
VUB2B1 W G1 G2 CBA
For motor (U, V, W)
For brake (B1, B2)
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
terminal (M4)
Main terminal box
terminal (M4)
11KB 15KB 18KB 22KB 30KB 37KB 45KB 55KB
Sliding distance
Frame leg viewed
from above
X
Z
W
S
U
T
Section AA
MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground)
terminal (M8)
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
1, 2
1
2A
A
R
B 110KA
Exhaust
90
N
F F XB
L
A
H
C
G
D
M
E E
J
KG
φ56
φ22
KL
KP
Main
terminal box
Sliding distance
Z
X
Frame leg viewed
from above
Section AA
U
T
W
S
MS3102A20-29P
Earth (ground)
terminal (M12)
Mark for earthing
(grounding)
1
2
D
H
C
G
M
E E
J
φ90
KP
KG
A
A
R
B 140
KA 110
N
F F XB
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of
cooling fan wind
L
A
1, 2
φ22 Main
terminal box
B2B1
U
G2G1
WV
CBA
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
For motor (U, V, W)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M8)
terminal (M4)
For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head
holes for manual opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the frame installation
foot as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.
0
-0.5

173
6
SPECIFICATIONS
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type)
For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20.
Frame Number 90L
SF-V5RUF(H)
SF-V5RUF(H) , , ,
SF-V5RUF(H) , , ,
Frame Number 200L
SF-V5RUF(H) , ,
SF-V5RU
K
SF-V5RU
K1
SF-V5RU
K3
SF-V5RU
K4
Flange
Number
Frame
No.
Mass
(kg)
D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) G1,G2
1 — — — FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 — 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 1 — — FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 2 1 — FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 3 2 — FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 — — —
FF350 180M
160
363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4
22 15 11 — 185
— 18 15 5 FF350 180L 225 363 230 416.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 728 4 18.5 110 110 90 55m6 10 6 16 M8 M4 M4
30 — — 7
FF400 200L
270
406 255 485 90 346 400 350j6 450 5 22 823.5 8 18.5 140 140 110 60m6 11 7 18 M10 M4 M4
37, 45 22, 30 18, 22 — 290
1K 2K 3K 5K 7K
LN LZ
KL
KD
LA
A
A
Section BB
U
W
T
S
Mark for earthing (grounding)
MS3102A20-29P
LL
KB LR
LG LE
QK
Q
LC
LB
B
B
Section
AA
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Section BB
W
U
T
S
LN LZ
KD
KL
IE
A
A
LA
MS3102A20-29P
LL
KB LR
LG LE
QK
Q
LC
LB
Section
AA
B
B
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
For motor (U, V, W)
A B G2G1U V W
terminal (M4)
11K 15K 18K 22K 30K 37K 45K
Section BB
W
S
T
U
A
A
LN LZ
LA
IE
KL
KD
QK
Q
MS3102A20-29P
With guard wires
Section
AA
LC
LB
B
B
LRKB
LG LE
LL
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
Section BB
W
S
T
U
LR
Q
QK
MS3102A20-29P
With guard wires
Section
AA
LC
LB
B
B
KB
LG LE
LL
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
Exhaust
A
A
LN LZ
LA
IE
KL
KD
For motor (U, V, W)
For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
terminal (M8)
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section
0
-0.5

174
Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type with brake)
For use under the shaft, the protection structure of the cooling fan is IP20.
5. Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure.
(This device should be arranged at the customer side.)
Frame Number 90L
SF-V5RUF(H)
SF-V5RUF(H) , , ,
Frame Number 160M, 160L
SF-V5RUF(H) ,
SF-V5RU
K
SF-V5RU
K1
SF-V5RU
K3
SF-V5RU
K4
Flange
Number
Frame
No.
Mass
(kg)
D KB KD KL KP LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U,V,W A,B,(C) B1,B2 G1,G2
1 — — — FF165 90L 31.5 183.6 198.5 27 220 155 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 442 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 1 — — FF215 100L 50 207 213 27 231 165 215 180j6 250 4 16 481.5 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 2 1 — FF215 112M 58 228 239 27 242 178 215 180j6 250 4 16 525 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 3 2 — FF265 132S 83 266 256 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 597 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 5 3 1 FF265 132M 88 266 294 27 256 197 265 230j6 300 4 20 635 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
11 7 5 2 FF300 160M 151 318 318 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 735.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 11 7 3 FF300 160L 167 318 362 56 330 231 300 250j6 350 5 20 779.5 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
1KB 2KB 3KB 5KB 7KB
MS3102A20-29P
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of
cooling fan wind
1
2
B
B
Section
AA
LC
LBLG LE
LL
LR
Q
QK
D
KB
LN LZ
1
2
KD
A
A
LA
KL
φ22
KP
Section BB
U
W
T
S
Main
terminal box
Section BB
W
S
U
T
MS3102A20-29P
QK
Q
Suction
Exhaust
Direction of
cooling fan wind
1
2
Section
AA
LC
LB
B
B
LR
LG LE
LL
D
KB
A LN LZ
A
1
2
LA
KD
KL
φ22
KP
Main
terminal box
VUB2B1 W G1 G2 CBA
For motor (U, V, W)
For brake (B1, B2)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M4)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M4)
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
11KB 15KB
Section BB
W
S
U
T
A
A
LN LZ
2
1
LA
KD
KL
φ22
KP
MS3102A20-29P
QK
Q
D
Suction
Direction of
cooling fan wind
1, 2
Section
AA
LC
LB
B
B
LL
KB LR
LG LE
Exhaust
Main
terminal box
B2B1
U
G2G1
WV
CBA
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
For motor (U, V, W)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M8)
Earthing
(grounding)
terminal (M4)
For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)
Terminal box for cooling fanMain terminal box
indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes
for manual opening.
Make sure to earth the earth terminal of the flange section
0
-0.5

175
6
SPECIFICATIONS
Dedicated motor (SF-THY) outline dimension drawings (1500r/min series)
Note) The tolerance of the top and bottom of the center shaft height *C is for the 250 frame and for the 280 frame or more.
Frame Number 250MD, 280MD
75kW to 160kW
Frame Number 280L, 315H
200kW, 250kW
Output
Frame
No.
Mass
(kg)
Motor Shaft End Size
A B C D E F G H J K K1 K2 L M N R Z XB KA KG Q QK S W T U
75 250MD 610 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 φ75m6 20 12 7.5
90 250MD 660 988.5 340.5 250 557 203 174.5 30 775 100 130 168 50 1471 486 449 482.5 24 168 157.5 635 140 110 φ75m6 20 12 7.5
110 280MD 870 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
132 280MD 890 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 449 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
160 280MD 920 1049.5 397.5 280 607 228.5 209.5 30 845 110 130 181 40 1619 560 499 569.5 24 190 210.5 705 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
200 280L 1170 1210.5 416.5 280 652 228.5 228.5 30 885 110 160 160 75 1799 560 607 588.5 24 190 214.5 745 170 140 φ85m6 22 14 9
250 315H 1630 1343 565 315 717 254 355 35 965 130 175 428 80 2084 636 870 741 28 216 306 825 170 140 φ95m6 25 14 9
L
A R
B
KA
Q
QK
Exhaust
MS3102A20-29P
Suction
K2 K2
K1
F F XB
N
K4-φZ hole
This hole is not used.
PF4 Class B screw
J
E E
S
W
M
H
KG
C
T
U
G
Direction of
cooling fan wind
L
A R
B
K2
K1 K
K2
XBFF
N
KA
Q
QK
ExhaustSuction
4-φZ hole
This hole is not used.
PF4 Class B screw
S
W
T
U
H
KG
G
C-1.0
J
E E
M
0
MS3102A20-29P
Direction of
cooling fan wind
0
-0.5
0
-1.0

176
Installation of the heatsink portion
outside the enclosure for use
6.4 Installation of the heatsink portion outside the enclosure
for use
When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by
installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact
enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended.
6.4.1 When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
For the FR-A720-1.5K to 55K, FR-A740-0.4K to 132K, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure using a
heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). (For the FR-A740-160K or more, attachment is not necessary when the
heatsink is to be protruded.)
For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)
to the inverter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment".
6.4.2 Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-A740-160K or more
(1) Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.
• FR-A740-160K, 185K
Unit: mm
• FR-A740-220K, 250K, 280K
Unit: mm
• FR-A740-315K, 355K
Unit: mm
• FR-A740-400K, 450K, 500K
Unit: mm
200 200
484
1395418
985
Hole
6-M10 screw
Hole
300 300
662
1595415
984
6-M10 screw
6-M10 screw771
1300
21125821
Hole
315 315
8-M10 screw
300 300 300
976
21150821
1550
Hole

6
SPECIFICATIONS
177
(2) Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame
• FR-A740-160K to 280K
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower
parts of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side
installation frame on the upper and lower sides of the inverter to
the front side as shown on the right. When changing the
installation frames, make sure that the installation orientation is
correct.
• FR-A740-315K or more
Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower
parts of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on
the upper and lower sides of the inverter as shown on the right.
Upper
installation
frame
Lower
installation
frame
Shift
Shift
Removal
Upper installation
frame (rear side)
Removal
Lower installation
frame (rear side)

178
(3) Installation of the inverter
Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower
installation frame.
CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure can not be used in the environment of water
drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.
Inverter
Inside the
enclosure
Enclosure
Exhausted air
Installation
frame
Dimension of
the outside of
the enclosure
Cooling
wind
D1
*
* For the FR-A740-160K or more, there are finger
guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the
thickness of the panel should be less than 10mm
(*1) and also do not place anything around finger
guards to avoid contact with the finger guards.
Unit: mm
Inverter Type D1
FR-A740-160K, 185K 185
FR-A740-220K to 500K 184
Enclosure
Finger guard
10*1
140
6

179
APPENDICES
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-A500 series
(1) Instructions for installation
1) Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 5.)
2) Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 5.)
3) Plug-in options of the A500 series are not compatible.
4) Operation panel (FR-DU04) can not be used.
5) Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP/FR-SW1-SETUP) can not be used.
(2) Wiring instructions
1) The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-A700 series without removing wiring.
Note that the wiring cover (0.4K to 22K) is not compatible.
(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-A700 series can not be used with the FR-A500 series
terminals.)
(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit)
1) For the FR-A700 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the
parameter name and setting range are not displayed. User initial value list and user clear of the HELP function
can not be used.
2) For the FR-A700 series, many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all alarms
are displayed as "Fault 14". When the alarm history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added alarm display
will not appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting can not be used.
4) User registration/clear (user group 2) can not be used.
5) Parameter copy/verification function can not be used.
(4) Parameter resetting
It is easy if you use setup software (FR-Configurator).
Appendix 1 For customers who have replaced the older model with this
inverter
FR-A500 series
FR-A700 series

180
(5) Main differences and compatibilities with the FR-A500(L) series
Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A200 <EXCELENT> series
Instructions for installation
• When using the installation holes of the FR-A200(E) series, FR-A5AT (intercompatibility attachment) is necessary.
Item FR-A500(L) FR-A700
Control method
V/F control
V/F control
Real sensorless vector control
Vector control (used with a plug-in option FR-A7AP)
Changed/cleared
functions
User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16)
(Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175)
User group (16) only
Setting methods were partially changed
(Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 173)
User initial value setting (Pr. 199)
User initial value setting (Pr. 199) was cleared
Substitutable with the copy function of the operation
panel (FR-DU07)
Long wiring mode
(Pr. 240 setting 10, 11)
Setting is not necessary
(Pr. 240 settings "10" and "11" were cleared)
Intelligent mode selection
(Pr. 60)
Parameter number change
(Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection)
(Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration)
Program operation
(Pr. 200 to Pr. 231)
Function was cleared
PID action set point setting
(Pr. 133)
Addition of "9999" to PID action set point (Pr. 133)
setting (a value input from terminal 2 is a set point)
Number of motor poles
(Pr. 81 , Pr. 144)
Setting the number of motor poles in Number of motor
poles (Pr. 81) automatically changes the speed setting
switchover (Pr. 144) setting.
Performing parameter clear and all clear (H5A96,
HAA99) with the FR-A7ND clears Pr. 345 and Pr. 346.
Pr. 345 and Pr. 346 are not cleared.
Terminal block Removable terminal block
Removable terminal block
Upward compatibility (A500 terminal block mountable)
PU FR-PU04, DU04
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
FR-PU04 (Some functions, such as parameter copy,
are unavailable.)
FR-DU04 unavailable
Plug-in options
Dedicated plug-in option (incompatible)
Computer link, relay output option
FR-A5NR
Built into the inverter
(RS-485 terminals, relay output 2 points)
Installation size
· FR-A720-0.4K to 90K, FR-A740-0.4K to 7.5K, 18.5K to 55K, 110K, 160K are compatible in mounting
dimensions
For the FR-A740-11K, 15K, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.
· Heatsink protrusion attachment is not compatible.
Also, the panel cut dimension of 3.7K or less, 200V class 30K, 55K or more, 400V class 11K, 15K, 75K or
more is not compatible.

181
(Conforming standard UL 508C, CSA C22.2 No.14)
(1) Installation
This inverter is UL-listed as a product for use in an enclosure.
Design an enclosure so that the inverter ambient temperature, humidity and atmosphere satisfy the specifications.
Wiring protection
For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National
Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code
and any applicable provincial codes.
Provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed Class RK5, Class T or Class L type fuse or UL489 molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit protection in accordance with the table below.
* Maximum allowable rating by US National Electrical Code.
Exact size must be chosen for each installation.
Appendix 2 Instructions for UL and cUL Compliance
FR-A720- K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Rated fuse voltage(V) 240V or more
Fuse
maximum
allowable
rating
(A)*
Without power
factor improving
reactor
15 20 30 40 60 80 150 175 200 225 300 350 400 500 500
With power
factor improving
reactor
15 20 20 30 50 70 125 150 200 200 250 300 350 400 500
Molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
maximum allowable
rating (A)*
15 15 20 25 40 60 80 110 150 175 225 250 350 400 500
FR-A720- K 75 90
Fuse
maximum
allowable
rating
(A)*
Without power
factor improving
reactor
⎯ ⎯
With power
factor improving
reactor
600 700
Molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
maximum allowable
rating (A)*
700 800
FR-A740- K 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Fuse
maximum
allowable
rating
(A)*
Without power
factor improving
reactor
6 10 15 20 30 40 70 80 90 110 150 175 200 250 300
With power
factor improving
reactor
6 10 10 15 25 35 60 70 90 100 125 150 175 200 250
Molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
maximum allowable
rating (A)*
15 15 15 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 125 150 200 250
FR-A740- K 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 250 280 315 355 400 450 500
Fuse
maximum
allowable
rating
(A)*
Without power
factor improving
reactor
⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
With power
factor improving
reactor
300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1350 1500 1800
Molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
maximum allowable
rating (A)*
350 450 500 600 800 800 1000 1200 1200 1200 1600 1600 2000 2000

182
(2) Wiring of the power supply and motor
For wiring the input (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and output (U, V, W) terminals of the inverter, use the UL Listed copper, stranded
wires (rated at 75°C) and round ring crimping terminals. Crimp the crimping terminals with the crimping tool
recommended by the terminal maker.
(3) Short circuit ratings
• 200V class
Suitable For Use in A Circuit Capable Of Delivering Not More Than 100kA rms Symmetrical Amperes, 264V Maximum.
• 400V class
55K or less
75K or more
(4) Motor overload protection
This inverter is certified as a motor overload protection device by UL.
When using the electronic thermal relay function as motor overload protection, set the rated motor current to Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay.
Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic
This function detects the overload (overheat) of the
motor, stops the operation of the inverter's output
transistor, and stops the output.
(The operation characteristic is shown on the left)
When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
1) Set "1" or any of "13" to "18", "50", "53", "54" in Pr. 71.
(This provides a 100% continuous torque characteristic
in the low-speed range.)
2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
*1 When a value 50% of the inverter rated output current (current
value) is set in Pr. 9
*2 The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output
current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
*3 When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies
to operation at 6Hz or higher.
CAUTION
⋅ Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-off.
⋅ When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
⋅ When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
⋅ A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use the external thermal relay.
For transistor protection
Electronic thermal relay
function
52.5% 105%
50 100 150
60
120
180
240
50
60
70
6Hz
20Hz
10Hz
6Hz
0.5Hz
30Hz or more*3
20Hz
10Hz
0.5Hz
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of
inverter rating*1.2
Pr. 9 = 100% setting
of inverter rating*1.2
(s)unitdisplayinthisrange
(min)unitdisplayin
thisrange
Operationtime(min)Operationtime(s)
Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay
function for motor
protection is turned off
(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))
30Hz
or more*3
Inverter output power (%)
(% to the rated input current)
Operation range
Range on the right of
characteristic curve
Non-operation range
Range on the left of
characteristic curve

183
(1) EMC Directive
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the EMC Directive (second environment of conforming standard EN61800-
3) and place the CE mark on the inverters.
Note: First environment
Environment including residential buildings. Includes buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power
supply network which supplies power to residential buildings.
Second environment
Environment including all buildings except buildings directly connected without a transformer to the low voltage power supply
network which supplies power to residential buildings.
1) Notes
Set the EMC filter valid and install the inverter and perform wiring according to the following instructions.
* The inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter. Set the EMC filter valid. (The EMC filter is invalid when shipped from the factory. (The
FR-A720-0.4K and 0.75K are always valid.) For details, refer to page 9.)
* Connect the inverter to an earthed power supply.
* Install a motor and a control cable written in the EMC Installation Manual (BCN-A21041-204) according to the instruction.
* The cable length between the inverter and the motor is 5 m maximum.
* Confirm that the inverter complies with the EMC Directive as the industrial drives application for final installation.
(2) Low Voltage Directive
We have self-confirmed our inverters as products compliant to the Low Voltage Directive (Conforming standard EN 50178) and place the
CE mark on the inverters.
1)Outline of instructions
* Do not use an earth leakage current breaker as an electric shock protector without connecting the equipment to the earth. Connect the
equipment to the earth securely.
* Wire the earth terminal independently. (Do not connect two or more cables to one terminal.)
* Use the cable sizes on page 15 under the following conditions.
⋅ Ambient temperature: 40°C maximum
If conditions are different from above, select appropriate wire according to EN60204 Appendix C TABLE 5.
* Use a tinned (plating should not include zinc) crimping terminal to connect the earth (ground) cable. When tightening the screw, be careful
not to damage the threads.
For use as a product compliant with the Low Voltage Directive, use PVC cable whose size is indicated on page 15.
* Use the moulded case circuit breaker and magnetic contactor which conform to the EN or IEC Standard.
* When using an earth leakage current breaker, use a residual current operated protective device (RCD) of type B (breaker which can detect
both AC and DC). If not, provide double or reinforced insulation between the inverter and other equipment, or put a transformer between the
main power supply and inverter.
* Use the inverter under the conditions of overvoltage category II (usable regardless of the earth (ground) condition of the power supply), overvoltage
category III (usable with the earthed-neutral system power supply, 400V class only) and pollution degree 2 or lower specified in IEC664.
⋅ To use the inverter of 30K or more (IP00) under the conditions of pollution degree 2, install it in the enclosure of IP 2X or higher.
⋅ To use the inverter under the conditions of pollution degree 3, install it in the enclosure of IP54 or higher.
⋅ To use the inverter of 22K or less (IP20) outside of an enclosure in the environment of pollution degree 2, fix a fan cover with fan cover
fixing screws enclosed.
* On the input and output of the inverter, use cables of the type and size set forth in EN60204 Appendix C.
* The operating capacity of the relay outputs (terminal symbols A1, B1, C1, A2, B2, C2) should be 30VDC, 0.3A. (Relay outputs are basically
isolated from the inverter internal circuit.)
* Control circuit terminals on page 8 are safely isolated from the main circuit.
* Environment
Details are given in the technical information "Low Voltage Directive Conformance Guide" (BCN-A21041-203). Please contact your sales
representative.
Appendix 3 Instructions for Compliance with the European Directives
FR-A720-1.5K to 3.7K
FR-A740-2.2K, 3.7K
FR-A720-5.5K to 11K
FR-A740-5.5K to 15K
FR-A720-15K to 22K
FR-A740-18.5K, 22K
During Operation In Storage During Transportation
Ambient temperature -10°C to +50°C -20°C to +65°C -20°C to +65°C
Ambient humidity 90% RH or less 90% RH or less 90% RH or less
Maximum altitude 1000m 1000m 10000m
Fan cover
fixing screw
Fan cover
Fan
Fan cover
fixing screws
Fan cover
Fan
Fan cover
fixing screw
Fan cover
Fan

184
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
For Maximum Safety
• Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised
to install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the
product are likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.
Print Date *
Manual Number Revision
Jun., 2005 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-A First edition
Aug., 2005 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-B
⋅ FR-A720-75K, 90K
⋅ FR-A740-0.4K to 160K
Sep., 2005 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-C
FR-A740-185K to 500K
Compatible with the FR-A7AP
⋅ Orientation control
⋅ Encoder feedback control
⋅ Vector control
Mar., 2007 IB(NA)-0600225ENG-D
⋅ Pr. 539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval
⋅ Setting value "4" of Pr. 17 MRS input selection
⋅ Setting values "10, 11" of Pr. 495 Remote output selection
⋅ Change in specification of a voltage/current input switch and addition of a
switch to the 3.7K or less.
Additions
Additions
Additions
Partial modification

Catalog FR-A700 Instruction manual (basic)-Beeteco.com

More Related Content

What's hot (11)

Similar to Catalog FR-A700 Instruction manual (basic)-Beeteco.com (20)

More from Beeteco (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Catalog FR-A700 Instruction manual (basic)-Beeteco.com